Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

REPEATERS JEE MAIN - 2025

(JEE MAIN ONE YEAR PROGRAMME)

STUDY MATERIAL

PHYSICS

Brilliant
STUDY CENTRE
PALA
Mutholy, Ph: 04822 - 206100, 206800
www.brilliantpala.org., email: [email protected].

1
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Page 2 blank

2
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CONTENTS
1. Units and Measurements ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05

2. Motion in a Straight Line ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14

3. Motion in a Plane ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22

4. Laws of Motion ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

5. Work Energy & Power ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47

6. System of Particles and Rigid Body Rotation --------------------------------------------- 55

7. Gravitation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69

8. Mechanical Properties of Solids & Fluids --------------------------------------------------- 77

9. Heat and Thermodynamics -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 88

10. Oscillations ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 102

11. Waves ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115

12. Electrostatics and Capacitance------------------------------------------------------------------ 129

13. Current Electricity -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 143

14. Moving Charges, Magnetism and matter --------------------------------------------------- 159

15. Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current -------------------------------- 173

16. Electromagnetic Waves ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 185

17. Ray Optics & Optical Instruments ------------------------------------------------------------- 194

18. Wave Optics ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 206

19. Modern Physics ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 213

20. Semiconductor Electronics ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 230

Syllabus.............................................................................................................250

3
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Page 4
Blank

4
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 01
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

SYNOPSIS
1. Measurement of any physical quantity involves comparison with a certain basic, arbitrarily chosen
internationally accepted reference standard called unit
2. Physical quantities that are independent of others are called fundamental quantities. Physical quantities
that can be defined in terms of the base quantities are called derived quantities. The units for the
fundamental or base quantities are called fundamental or base units. The units of all other physical
quantities can be expressed as a combination of the base units. Such units obtained for the derived
quantities are called derived units
3. A system of units is a family of units of fundamental and derived physical quantities. The system of
units which is at present internationally accepted for measurement is the “system international d
units’’ abbreviated as SI.
Other system of units are
a) C.G.S (Centimetre, Gram, Second)
b) F.P.S (Foot, Pound, Second)
c) M.K.S (Metre, Kilogram, Second)
SI base quantities and units

SI unit
Base quantity
Name symbol
Length metre m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
Electric current ampere A
Thermodynamic temperature kelvin K or 
Amount of substance mole mol
Luminous intensity candela cd

Besides these seven base units (given above) there are two more units that are defined for plane
angle and solid angle. The unit for Plane angle is radian (rad) and unit for the solid angle is
steradian (sr).
4. Practical units of Lengths
0
1 fermi = 1f = 10–15 m; 1 angstrom = 1A = 10–10m

5
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 astronomical unit = 1Au mean (distance of the sun from the earth) = 1.496 x 1011m
1 light year = 1ly = 9.46 x 10 15m (distance that light travels with velocity of 3 x 108 ms–1 in 1 year)
1 par sec = 3.26 light years = 3.08 x 1016 m
(Note that parsec is an abbreviation of parallactic second)
Dimensions of physical quantities
1. The dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to which the base quantities are raised to
represent that quantity.
2. The nature of a physical quantity is described by its dimensions
3. All the physical quantities represented by derived units can be expressed in terms of some combination
of seven fundamental or base quantities.
4. Length has the dimension [L], mass [M], time [T], electric current [A], thermodynamic temperature [K]
luminous intensity [Cd] and amount of substance [mol]
5. Using the square brackets [ ] around a quantity means that we are dealing with the dimensions of that
quantity
6. In mechanics all the physical quantities can be written in terms of dimensions [L], [M] and [T]
eg: Force = mass x acceleration = mass x (length) /(time)2
 M  L
ie the dimensions of force are = [MLT
T–2]
T 
2

ie force has one dimension in mass, one dimension in length and –2 dimensions in time. The dimensions
in all other base quantities are zeros
In this type of representation, the magnitudes are not considered.
7. The dimensional equations are the equations which represent the dimensions of a physical quantity in
terms of the base quantities
for eg: the dimensional eqn of volume [V] may be expressed as
[V] = [MoL3To]
8. Only those physical quantities can be added or subtracted which have the same dimensions. ie velocity
cannot be added to force
9. The arguments of special functions, such as the trignometric, logarithmic and exponential functions
are dimensionless. A pure number, ratio of similar physical quantities has no dimensions
Dimensionless quantities
Angle, solid angle, trigonometrical ratios, relative density, relative permittivity, relative permeability,
Poisson’s ratio, strain, refractive index, mechanical equivalent of heat (Joules constant),  , angular
 Cp 
displacement, emissivity, thermo-dynamic constant    C  , limit of resolution of telescope (angle),
 v 

Power factor  cos   , form factor, quality factor (Q), amplication factor (  ), and efficiency have no
dimensions and is equal to M 0 L0 T 0 A 0 0 cd 0 mol0 .
10. Different quantities having same dimensions
a.Work, energy, heat, torque, couple, moment of force have same dimensions viz  ML T  . Units of
2 2

energy like erg, joule, calorie, electron volt and kWh also have the same dimensions. Potential energy
1 2 1 2 1 2
(mgh), kinetic energy  mv or I  , energy contained in an inductance  LI  , electrostatic energy
2 2  2 
1 1 2 Q 2
  2 V2 
of condenser  2 QV, CV ,   I Rt,VIt, t
 2 2C  and energy spent in a resistance  R  also have the
dimensions  ML T  .
2 2

6
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

b. Linear momentum and linear impulse have same dimensions ie,  MLT 
1

c. Angular momentum, angular impulse and Planck’s constant have same dimensions ie,  ML T 
2 1

d. Stress, pressure, Young’s modulus, rigidity modulus, bulk modulus of elasticity and energy density
have the same dimensions ie,  ML T 
1 2

e. Surface tension, surface energy, spring constant and force gradient have same dimensions ie,
 ML0 T 2 

f. Thermal capacity, entropy, Boltzmann’s constant have same dimensions ie,  ML T  

2 2 1

g. Velocity gradient, frequency and angular speed have same dimensions ie, T 
1

h. Latent heat and square of velocity have dimension  M L T 

0 2 2

i. Speed and velocity have dimension  M LT 

0 1

j. Distance, displacement, amplitude, wavelength and focal length have dimension  M L T 

0 1 0

k. Time, L/R (Inductance/Resistance), CR (Capacitance × resistance) and LC have dimension

 M 0 L0 T1 

1 1
are denoted by  M L T 
0 0 1
l. Dimension of frequency, R / L, and
CR LC
1
m. Dimension of velocity, Latent Heatand are denoted by  M 0 LT 1  . where  0 is magnetic
 0 0

permeability and 0 is the electrical permittivity..

11. A dimensionally correct equation need not be actually a correct equation, but dimensionally wrong,
incorrect or inconsistent equation must be wrong.
12. Uses of dimensions
i) Conversion of units from one system of units to another
ii) To check the dimensional correctness of a given physical equation
iii) To establish the relation among various physical quantities
13. Limitations
If a physical quantity depends on more than three factors, the relation among them cannot be established
because we can have only three equation by establishing the powers of M,L and T.
14. Principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions
This principle states that the dimensions of all the terms in a physical expression should be the same.
For eg, in the physical expression s = ut + 1/2 at2, the dimensions of s, ut, 1/2at2 all are same. The
physical quantities separated by the symbols
+, –, =, >, < etc have the same dimensions.
Least count
The smallest division on the scale of a measuring instrument is called its least count.

7
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Significant figures
Significant figures indicate, the precision of the measurement which depends on the least count of the
measuring instrument.
The reliable digits plus the first uncertain digit are known as the significant digits or significant figures.
Common rules for counting significant figure.
1. A choice of change of different units does not change the number of significant digits or figure in a
measurement
2. All the non zero digits are significant
3. All the zeros between two non - zero digits are significant, no matter where the decimal point is, if at all
4. If the number is less than 1, the zeros on the right of decimal point but to the left of the first non zero
digit are not significant
5. The trailing zeros in a number with a decimal point are significant
6. The terminal or trailing zeros in a number without a decimal point are not significant.
Rules for Arithmetic operations with significant figures
1. In multiplication and devision, the final result should retain as many significant figures as there are in
the original number with the least significant figures.
2. In addition and subtraction, the final result should retain as many decimal places as there are in the
number with the least decimal places.
Rounding off the uncertain digit
1. Preceding digit is raised by 1 if the insignificant digit to be dropped is more than 5, and is left unchanged
if the latter is less than 5.
2. If the insignificant digit is 5 and if the preceding digit is even, the insignificant digit is simply dropped
and if it is odd, the preceding digit is raised by 1.
Error
5. The result of every measurement by any measuring instrument is an approximate number, which
contains some uncertainty. This uncertainty is called error
The accuracy of a measurement is a measure of how close the measured value is to the true value of
the quantity Precision tells us to what resolution or limit the quantity is measured.
In general, the error in measurement can be broadly classified as (a) systematic errors and (b) random
errors.
a) Systematic errors: are those errors that tend to be in one direction either positive or negative.
some of the sources are
i) Instrumental errors (due to imperfect design or calibration, zero error)
ii) Imperfection in experimental technique or procedure (due to changes in external condition)
iii) Personal errors
c) Random errors
These are those errors which are irregular and thus random in nature with respect to their sign or size.
The causes of these errors are not known. The same person may get different readings for the same
measurement on two occasions.

8
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Types of errors
a) Absolute error
a = actural value
ai = ith observed value

absolute error, a i  a i  a
b) Relative or fractional error

a i
The relative error in the ith reading is =
a

absolute error
=
actual value
c) Percentage error

 ai
= 100
a
Determination of the actual value
No instrument can give the actual value because every instrument has a least count ie a certain
precision. So arithmetic mean of all readings is assumed to be the actual value a.
Note: The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is taken as the final mean absolute error of the
value of the physical quantity a.
Combination of errors
a) Error of a sum or a difference
Rule: when two quantities are added or subtracted, the absolute error in the final result is the sum of
the absolute errors in the individual quantities.
b) Error of a product or a quotient
Rule: When two quantities are multipled or divided, the maximum fractional error in the result is the
sum of the fractional errors in the individual quantities
c) Error due to the power of a measured quantity, fractional error or relative error in a quantity
raised to power (n) is n times fractional / relative error in the quantity itself.

A p Bq
if Z  Z / Z  P  A / A   q  B / B   r   C / C 
Cr
Rule: The fractional error in a physical quantity raised to some power is the power times the fractional
error in the individual quantities
Eg: Find the fractional error in Z, If Z = A4 B1/3/ CD3/2
Ans: The fractional error in Z is,

Z  A   1   B   C  3  D 
 4      
Z  A   3 B   C  2 D 

9
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

1. Par sec is the unit of

1) Time 2) Distance

3) Frequency 4) Angular acceleration

2. The advantage(s) of choosing the wavelength of a particular light radiation as a standard of length is/
are

I. it can be easily and accurately reproduced

II. it is not affected by environmental conditions

III. it is very sensitive to environmental conditions

IV. it is independent of other physical quantities

Which of the above statement(s) is/are correct?

1) I only 2) I and II 3) I and III 4) I, II and IV

3. Which of the following quantities has not been expressed in proper unit ?

a) Torque : Newton metre

b) Stress : Newton metre–2

c) Modulus of elasticity : Newton metre–2

d) Power : Newton metre second

e) Surface tension : Newton metre–2

1) a,b 2) a,c 3) d,e 4) b,c

4. The density of material in CGS system of units is 4g/cm3 in a system of urine in which unit of length
is 10cm and unit of mass is 100g, the value of density of material will be

1) 0.4 2) 40 3) 400 4) 0.04

5. A force is given by F  at  bt 2 , where t is time. What are the dimension of a and b

1) MLT-3 and ML2T-4 2) MLT-3 and MLT-4

3) MLT-3 and MLT0 4) MLT-4 and MLT1

6. A dimensionless quantity

1) never has a unit 2) always has a unit

3) may have a unit 4) does not exist

10
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

7. Which of the following choices does not represent the same dimensions of the mentioned physical
quantities?

1) Heat, potential energy and work

2) Electric flux, electric field and electric dipole moment

3) Pressure, stress and Young;s modulus

4) Potential difference, voltage and electromotive force of a galvanic cell

8. If E, M, J and G, respectively, denotes energy, mass, angular momentum and gravitational constant,
EJ2/M5G2 has the dimensions of

1) length 2) angle 3) mass 4) time

The dimensions of   0 0   2  are

 1
9.

1) [L1/2T1/2] 2) [L1/2T-1/2] 3) [L-1T] 4) [LT-1]

10. A student writes four different expressions for the displacement y in a periodic motion as a function of
time t, a as amplitude, T as time period. Which of the following can be correct?

2t
1) y  aT sin 2) y = a sin Vt
T

a t a  2t 2t 
3) y  sin 4) y   sin  cos
T a 2 T T 

11. If the velocity (V), acceleration (A), and force (F) are taken as fundamental quantities instead of mass
(M), length(L), and time (T), the dimensions of Young’s modulus (Y) would be

1) FA2V-4 2) FA2V-5 3) FA2V-3 4) FA2V-2

12. The largest mass (m) that can be moved by a flowing river depends on velocity (v), density    of river
water and acceleration due to gravity (g). The correct relation is

2 v 4 v6 v 4 v6
1) m  2) m  3) m  4) m 
g2 g2 g3 g3

13. From the point of view of significant figures, which of the following statements are correct

i) 10.2 cm + 8 cm = 18.2 cm ii) 2.53 – 1.2 m = 1.33 m

iii) 4.2 m × 1.4 m = 5.88 m2 iv) 3.6 m  1.75 s  2.1m / s

1) i only 2) i and iv 3) i and ii 4) iv only

11
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

14. In simple pendulum experiment percentage error in length and time period are 2% and 1% respectively.
The percentage error in the calculation of g is :

1) 1% 2) 2% 3) 3% 4) 4%

15. The density of a sphere is measured by measurement its mass and diameter. If it isknown that the
maximum percentage errors in the measurement are 2% and 3%, what is the maximum percentage
error in the measurement of density?

1) 8% 2) 10% 3) 11% 4) 5%

16. Students I, II and III perform an experiment for measuring the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a
simple pendulum. They use the different lengths of the pendulum and /or record time for different
number of observations. The observations are shown in the table.

Least count for length = 0.1 cm

Least for time = 0.1 s

Length of the No. of Time for n

Student
pendulum (cm) oscillations (n) oscillations (a)

I 64 8 128

II 64 4 64

III 20 4 36

If E1, EII and EIII are the percentage errors in g for the studnets I, II and III respectively, then

1) EI is minimum 2) EII is maximum

3) EI = 0 4) EI = EII

17. A public park, in the form of a square, has an area of 100  0.2  m2 . The side of park is:

1) 10  0.01 m 2) 10  0.1 m 3) 10  0.02 m 4) 10  0.2  m

18. A vernier callipers has 1mm marks on the main scale. It has 20 equal divisions on the vernier scale
which match with 16 main scale divisions. For this vernier calipers, the least count is

1) 0.02 mm 2) 0.05 mm 3) 0.1 mm 4) 0.2 mm

12
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

19. Match correctly column I and column II

Column I Column II

A) LInear mass density P) [M0L0T-1]

B) Velocity gradient Q) [ML-1T-2]

C) Pressure R) [ML-1T-1]

D) Coefficient of viscosity S) [ML-1T0]

1) A-P, B-Q, C-R, D-S 2) A-S, B-P, C-R, D-Q

3) A-S, B-Q, C-R, D-P 4) A-S, B-P, C-Q, D-R

20. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T  2 L / g . Measured value of L is 10 cm known

to 1mm accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 50s using a wrist watch
of 1s resolution.What is the accuracy in the determination of g?

1) 2% 2) 3% 3) 4% 4) 5%

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. In a new system of units, the unit of mass is 100 g, unit of length is 4 m and unit of time is 2 s. Find the
numerical value of 10 J in this system.

22. The length of a wire is 2.17 cm and radius is 0.46 cm. Find number of significant digits in the value of
volume of wire.

23. If the screw on a screw-gauge is given six rotations, it moves by 3 mm on the main scale. If there are
50 divisions on the circular scale, the least count of the screw gauge is n  10 3 cm . Then value of n
is:

r 2 R
24. The specific resistance  of a circular wire of radius r, resistance R and length L is given by   .

Given r  0.24  0.02cm , R  30  1 and l = 4.80±0.01cm . The percentage error in  is nearly..

25. The relative density of material is found by weighing the body first in air and then in water. If the weight
in air is 10.0  0.1 gf and the weight of water is  5.0  0.1 gf , then the maximum permissible
percentage error in relative density is

13
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 02
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE

SYNOPSIS
1. Point Object :- An object is said to be a point object if it changes its position by distances which are
much greater than its size.
2. State of rest :- An object or particle is said to be in a state of rest if it does not change its position with
time with respect to its surroundings
3. State of motion :- An object or particle is said to be in a state of motion if it changes its position with
respect to its surroundings
4. Motion in one dimension :- It is that motion in which a particle or a body moves in one particular
direction w.r.to a point of reference.
5. Distance :- It is the length of actual path traversed by a body during motion in a given interval of time.
Distance is a scalar quantity. The distance travelled by a body can never be zero or negative.
6. Displacement :- Displacement of a body in a given time is defined as the change in position of the
body in a particular direction.
1) Displacement is a vector quantity
2) The unit of displacement is that of length
3) Displacement can be positive, zero or negative
4) The value of displacement can never be greater than the distance travelled
5) When a moving body returns to its starting point then its effective displacement is zero
7. Speed :- The speed of a particle or body is defined as the distance travelled by it in unit time
distance
Speed = is a scalar quantity
time
8. Uniform speed :- A body is said to move with uniform speed, if it covers equal distances in equal
intervals of time, howsoever small these intervals may be
9. Variable speed :- A body is said to be moving with a variable speed if it covers equal distances in
unequal intervals of time or unequal distances in equal intervals of time.
10. Average speed :- When a body is moving with a variable speed, then the average speed of the body
is defined as the ratio of total distance travelled by the body to the total time taken.
total distance travelled
Average speed =
total time taken
11. Instantaneous speed :- When the body is moving with variable speed, then the speed of the body at
a given instant of time is called its instantaneous speed.
12. Velocity :- Velocity of a particle or body is defined as the rate of change of displacement

14
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

1) Velocity is a vector quantity

2) Velocity of a body can be zero, negative or positive
3) Velocity can never be greater than the speed of the body
13. Uniform velocity :- A body is said to be moving with uniform velocity, if it undergoes equal displacements
in equal intervals of time; howsoever these intervals may be.
14. Average velocity :- When a body is moving with a variable velocity, the average velocity of the body in
a given time is defined as the ratio of the total displacement to the total time taken.
total displacement
Average Velocity =
total time taken
15. Instantaneous Velocity :-
1) When a body is moving with a variable velocity the velocity of the body at a given instant of time is
called instantaneous velocity.

2) If at an instant t, a body while moving covers a displacement  r in a small interval of time t , so

r dr
that t  0 , then instantaneous velocity = Lt 
t 0 t dt

dr
( is the first derivative of displacement r w.r.t. time)
dt
16. Acceleration :- Acceleration of a particle or body is defined as the rate of change of velocity.
Change in velocity
acceleration 
time taken
1) Acceleration is a vector quantity and its S.I.unit is m/s2.
2) Acceleration can be positive negative or zero
3) Negative acceleration is called retardation or deceleration
17. Uniform acceleration :- A object is said to be moving with a uniform acceleration, if its velocity changes
by equal amounts in equal intervals of time.
total change in velocity
Average acceleration = total time taken
18. Instantaneous acceleration : If at an instant ‘t’ a body while moving with variable acceleration then
the acceleration of the body at a given instant of time is called instantaneous acceleration.

v dv
instantaneous acceleration = Lt 
t 0 t dt
dv
( is the first derivative of velocity w.r. to time)
dt
19. Displacement time graph :- A graph drawn with time along the x-axis and the displacement along the
y-axis.

1)

For a stationary body, the time displacement graph AB, is a straight line parallel to the time axis

15
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2)

Uniform motion. Equal displacement take place at equal intervals of time.

dx
Velocity = = slope of the straight line OA.
dt

dx
V  tan  . Where  is the angle made by the straight line OA with the time axis.
dt

3)

Body moving with constant acceleration. The graph is a curve which bends upwards.

4)

Body moving with constant deceleration

20. Velocity time graph :- A graph drawn with velocity along the y-axis and time along the x-axis.

1)

Body moving with constant velocity the velocity time graph is a straight line AB parallel to the time
axis.

2)

Body moving with constant acceleration and its initial velocity is zero. It is a straight line inclined to
the time axis. The slope of the line OA gives the acceleration. The area under the v-t graph gives
the displacement.

16
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

3)

Body moves with constant retardation and its initial velocity is not zero the velocity time graph is an
oblique. Straight line AB not passing through origin.

4)

Body moving with increasing accelerations. The v-t graph is a curve which bend upwards.

5) Body moving with negative acceleration

21. Equations of motion

u = initial velocity of body
a = Uniform acceleration of the body
v = velocity after a time t
s = distance travelled by the body in time t
sn = distance travelled by the body in the nth second
1) V = u + at
2) V2 = u2 + 2as
3) S = ut + 1/2 at2
a
4) Sn = u + (2n-1)
2
22. Relative velocity :-
1) The relative velocity of one body w.r.t another body is the velocity with which one body moves w.r.t
another body
2) The relative velocity of one body w.r.t. another body is defined as the time rate of change of relative
position w.r.t. to another.
3) When two bodies A and B are in relative motion, the relative velocity of body A w.r.t. to body B can
be obtained by imposing equal and opposite velocity of B on both A and B, so that B is brought to
rest. The resultant of the two velocities of A gives the relative velocity of body A w.r.t body B.
  
i.e., Relative velocity of A w.r.t B is VAB  VA  VB
  
Relative velocity of B w.r.t A is VBA  VB  VA
4) When two bodies are moving along parallel straight lines in the same direction, the relative velocity
of A w.r.t. B is

VAB = VA - VB is the direction of VA
5) When two bodies are moving along parallel straight lines in opposite directions, the relative velocity
of A w.r.t. B is 
VAB = VA + VB in the direction of VA

Relative velocity of B w.r.t. A is VAB = VB + VA in the direction of VB

17
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

th
1
1. A cyclist travels from centre O of a circular park of radius 1km and reaches point P. After cycling
4
of the circumference along PQ, he returns to the centre of the park along QO. If the total time taken
is 10 minute, then his distance and displacement are respectively

25 25
1) km, zero 2) 25 km, 5km 3) 2km, 2.5 km 4) zero, km
7 7
2. A particle moving in a straight line covers half the distance with speed of 3m/s. The other half of the
distance covered in two euqal time intervals with speed of 4.5m/s and 7.5 m/s respectively. The
average speed of the particle during this motion is
1) 4.0 m/s 2) 5.0 m/s 3) 5.5 m/s 4) 4.8 m/s
3. On a 100km straight road, a car travels the first half at a uniform speed of 30 km h-1. How fast must
the car travel for the next half so that the average speed of 45 km h-1 is attained for the journey?
1) 45 km h-1 2) 90 km h-1 3) 70 km h-1 4) 35 km h-1|
4. A body moves in a straight line for some time and then returns to the starting point. If the total time
taken by the body to complete this path is 20 s and the total distance travelled is 40 m, then which of
the statements is incorrect regarding the motion of the body?
1) The displacement of the body is 20m 2) The displacement of the body is zero
3) The average speed of the body is 2.0 ms-1 4) The average velocity of the body is zero
5. A bullet fired into a fixed target loses half of its velocity after penetrating 3cm. How much further it will
penetrate before coming to rest assuming that it faces constant resistance to motion?
1) 1.5 cm 2) 1.0 cm 3) 3.0 cm 4) 2.0 cm
6. A particle moving with uniform acceleration has velocity 6 ms-1 at a distance 5m from the initial
position. After moving another 7m, the velocity becomes 8 ms-1. The initial velocity and acceleration
of the particle are
1) 6 ms-1, 1 ms-2 2) 4 ms-1, 4 ms-2 3) 4 ms-1, 2 ms-2 4) 2 ms-1, 4 ms-2

18
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

7. A car accelerates from rest at constant rate for first 10 seconds and covers a distance x. It covers a
distance y in next 10 s at the same acceleration. Which of the following is true?
1) x = y 2) x = 3y 3) y = 2x 4) y = 3x
8. An automobile travelling with a speed of 60km h-1 can brake to stop within a distance of 20m. If the car
is going twice as fast, that is, 120km h-1, the stopping distance is
1) 29 m 2) 40 m 3) 80 m 4) 100 m

9. The acceleration a of a particle starting from rest varies with time according to the relation a  t   .
The velocity of the particle after time t is

1)
 t 2
  1
2) t   t
2
3)
t 2
 4)
t 2
 t
2 2 2 2

10. The position x of a particle with respect to time t along x-axis is given by x  9t 2  t 3 where x is in
meters and t in second. What will be the position of this particle when it achieves maximum speed
along the positive x-direction?
1) 54 m 2) 81 m 3) 24 m 4) 32 m
11. Which of the following statements regarding the freely falling body from rest are correct?
1) The body is non-uniformly accelerated 2) The body is not accelerated
3) The distance travelled by the body in the first second, first two seconds and first three seconds are
in the ratio of 1:3:5.
4) The distance travelled by the body in the first second, first two seconds and first three seconds are
in the ratio of 1:4:9.
12. A man throws a ball vertically upwards and it rises through 20m and returns to his hands. The initial
velocity of the ball and time for the ball remained in air (g = 10 ms-2) are
1) 20 ms-1, 4s 2) 10 ms-1, 2s 3) 20 ms-1, 2s 4) 10 ms-1, 4s
13. A, B, C are pointrs in a vertical line such that AB = BC. If a body falls freely from rest at A, and t1 and
t2 are times taken to travel distances AB and BC, then find the ratio t2 / t1

1
1) 2 1 2) 2 1 3) 2 2 4)
2 1
14. A parachutist after bailing out falls 50 m without friction. When parachute opens, it decelerates at
2 ms-2, He reaches the ground with a speed of 3 ms-1. At what height, did he bail out?
1) 293 m 2) 111 m 3) 91 m 4) 182 m
15. A body dropped from top of a tower falls through 60m during the last 2s of its fall. The height of tower
is (g = 10 ms-1)
1) 95 m 2) 80 m 3) 90 m 4) 60 m
16. A monkey sitting on a branch of a tree 20m high drops a mango directly above the head of a boy as he
runs with a speed of 1.5 ms-1 under the tree. How far behind the boy, does the mango hit the ground?
1) 2.0 m 2) 4.0 m 3) 3.0 m 4) 1.0 m

19
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17.` A man drops a ball from the roof of a tower of height 400m. At the same time, another ball is thrown
upwards with a velocity 60ms-1 from the ground. Where would they meet each other? (from ground)
(g = 10 ms-2)
1) 60m 2) 178m 3) 100m 4) 200m
18. A scootersist sees a bus 1 km ahead of him moving with a velocity 10 ms-1. With what speed the
scooterist should move so as to overtake the bus in 100 s?
1) 10 ms-1 2) 20 ms-1 3) 30 ms-1 4) 40 ms-1
19. A train (X) of length 30m travels with a speed of 30km h-1. Another train (Y) of length 30 m travels at a
speed of 60km h-1. The ratio of the times taken by the train (x) to completely cross the train (Y) (i)
when they are moving in the same direction and (ii) in opposite direction is

3 1 2 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
1 3 1 2
20. A particle starts from rest at t = 0 and undergoes an acceleration a in ms-2 with time t in seconds
which is shown in figure. Which one of the following plots represents velocity v (in ms-1) versus time
t (in s)?

1) 2)

3) 4)

20
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Statement Questions

Read the following questions and give your answer using the following options (a,b, c and d):

a) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement -2 is correct explanation for Statement -1

b) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement -2 is not correct explanation for Statement -1

c) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false

d) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true

21. Statement -1 : A body can have acceleration even if its velocity is zero at a given instant of time

Statement -2 : A body is momentarily at rest when it reverses its direction of motion.

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

22. A bus is moving with velocity of 10 ms-1 on a straight road. A scooterist wishes to overtake the bus in
one minute. If the bus is at a distance of 1.2 km ahead, then the velocity with which he has to chase
the bus is (in ms-1)

23. A particle starts from the origin at time t = 0 and moves along the positive x-axis. The graph of velocity
with respect to time is shown in figure. The position of the particle at time t= 5 second (in m) is

24. Two balls are dropped from same height at 1 second interval of time. The separation between the two
balls after 2s of the drop of the first ball is (Take g = 10 ms-2) ( in m)

25. A train of 150m length is going towards north direction at a speed of 10 ms-1. A parrot flies at a speed
of 5 ms-1 towards south direction parallel to a railway track. The time taken by the parrot to cross the
train (in s) is

21
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 03
MOTION IN A PLANE

VECTORS
A vector is a quantity having both magnitude and direction.
• Representation of a vector
 
r  r nˆ where r  r gives the magnitude and n̂ is a unit vector that gives direction

• Unit vectors along the three coordinate axes are called orthogonal unit vectors. They are named ˆi, ˆj, kˆ
respectively
• Magnitude of a vector
 ˆ ˆ its magnitude is given by r  x 2  y2  z 2
If a vector is represented as r  x ˆi+yj+zk,
• Types of vectors
 Equal vectors - two vectors having equal magnitude and same direction
 Parallel vectors - vectors along the same direction
 Antiparallel vectors - vectors in opposite directions
 Collinear vectors - vectors along the same line
 Zero vector - a vector having zero magnitude
 Coplanar vectors - vectors over the same plane
VECTOR ADDITION
1. Triangle law of vector addition

If a, b are the consecutive sides of a triangle then the resultant is given by the closing side of the
triangle taken in the opposite order. Magnitude of the resultant is given by,

R  a 2  b 2  2ab cos 
2. Parallelogram law of vector addition
 
If P &Q represent the adjacent sides of a parallelogram, the resultant vector is given by the diagonal of
 
the parallelogram drawn from the meeting point of tails of P and Q
22
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)


Magnitude of the resultant vector is given by, R  P 2  Q 2  2PQ cos 

Qsin
Also, tan 
P  Qcos 
Special cases
  
1. If the vectors are along the same direction,   0  R  P  Q
0

  
2. If the vectors are in opposite directions,   1800  R  P  Q

3. If the vectors are perpendicular to each other,   90 0  R  P 2  Q 2
Note
     
The resultant of vectors P and Q always lies between P  Q and P  Q

3. Polygon law of vector addition

If a, b, c, d and e are the successive sides of a polygon, the resultant vector is given by the closing side
of the polygon taken in the opposite order.

f  a  b  c  d+ e
VECTOR SUBTRACTION

 
P  Q  P 2  Q 2  2PQ cos 

APPLICATIONS
1. Relative velocity

23
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

 
If VA and VB are the velocities of bodies A and B travelling at an angle  apart, relative velocity of A with
respect to B is given by
  
VAB  VA  VB  VA 2  VB 2  2VA VB Cos
2. Acceleration
 
   Vf  Vi
If Vi and Vf are the initial and final velocities, acceleration is given by a 
t
PRODUCT OF VECTORS
I. Dot product (Scalar product)
 
Dot product of vectors A and B is defined as
     
A .B= A B Cos   angle between A and B
   
Note: If A  a1ˆi  a 2ˆj  a 3 kˆ and B=b1ˆi  b 2 ˆj  b3 kˆ , then A.B  a1b1  a 2 b 2  a 3b3
• Properties
   
1. It is commutative, A.B  B.A
    
 
2. It is distributive, A. B  C  A.B  A.C

 A.B  
 
3. Angle between the vectors A and B ,   Cos 1
 
A B
 
 
4. If two vectors are perpendicular,   90 0  A.B  0
 
5. A.A  A 2
6. ˆi.iˆ  1; ˆj.j=1;k.k=1
ˆ ˆ ˆ ie., identical unit vectors when taken dot product give one

7. ˆi.jˆ  0 ˆj.k=0
ˆ ˆ ˆ ie., unlike unit vectors when taken dot product give zero.
; k.i=0
Note: The common situations where the dot product is used are given below:
 
(i) Power = F.V

(ii) Work = F.d
   
(iii) Flux = E.A or B.A
II. Cross product (Vector product)
 
Cross product of vectors A and B is defined as
   
A  B  A B sin nˆ
When n̂ represents the direction. Direction is given by right handed screw rule.
 
If a right handed screw is rotated from A to B, the direction of tip of the screw gives the direction of
 
AB.
• Properties
   
1. It is not commutative, ie, A  B  B  A

24
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

      

2. It is distributive , ie, A  B  C  A  B  A  C 
 
   AB 
3. Angle between two vectors A and B ,   sin    
1

 A B 
 
 
4. If two vectors are parallel,   0  A  B  0
 
5. A  A  0

6. ˆi  ˆi  0; ˆj  ˆj  0; kˆ  k=0
ˆ

7. ˆi  ˆj  k;
ˆ ˆj  kˆ  ˆi; kˆ  ˆi=jˆ
Note: 1
The common situations where the cross product is used are listed below:
     
(i) Torque,   r  F (ii) Angular momentum, L  r  P (iii) Linear velocity, V   r
Note : 2
 
If A  a1ˆi  a 2ˆj  a 3kˆ and B=b1ˆi  b 2ˆj  b3kˆ

i j k
 
A  B  a1 a2 a3
b1 b 2 b3

  a 2 b3  a 3 b 2  ˆi   a1b3  a 3b1  ˆj   a1b 2  a 2 b1  kˆ

• Lami’s theorem

 sin  sin  sin 

 
In ABC with sides a,b,c
a b c

• Resolution of a vector into components

(i) Vector in a plane

The vector can be split up into two components, A cos  and A sin 

(ii) Vector in space A  A x ˆi  A y ˆj  A z kˆ

Ax
Cos  l   angle between the vector and the x - axis
A
25
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Ay
Cos  m   angle between the vector and the y - axis
A
Az
Cos  n   angle between the vector and the z - axis
A
l, m, n are called direction cosines. Also, l2  m 2  n 2  cos 2   cos 2   cos2   1
Note: 1
If a body is in equilibrium under a set of non-collinear forces, the minimum number of forces has to be
three
Note: 2
 
(a) If A, B are the adjacent sides of a parallelogram, area of the parallelogram is given by
 
Area = A  B
 
(b) If diagonals C and D are given,
 
Area = 1 2 C  D 
PROJECTILES
I. OBLIQUE PROJECTILE
A body projected at a particular angle with an initial velocity u
Assumptions
1. Friction due to air is neglected
2. There is no horizontal force acting on the body
• Projectile motion is a two dimensional motion. The path taken by the body is parabolic and is called
trajectory.
• Initial velocity u has two components; horizontal  u cos   and vertical  u sin  
• As the body starts ascending, vertical component decreases; becomes zero at the topmost point; in-
creases during the descent.
• Horizontal velocity remains u cos  throughout the motion.
• At the topmost point,

a) velocity = u cos
b) momentum = mu cos 
1
c) kinetic energy = mu 2 cos 2 
2
d) potential energy  1 mu 2 sin 2 
2

Note :1
If   450 , kinetic energy and potential energy at the topmost point are equal.
Note :2
During the motion of a projectile, total energy remains conserved. During the ascent, kinetic energy is
converted to potential energy and during descent potential energy is converted back to kinetic energy

26
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Note :3
For a projectile,
a) Velocity of projection = velocity of landing
b) Kinetic energy of projection = kinetic energy of landing

gx 2
• Equation of trajectory of a projectile is y  x tan  
2u 2 cos 2 

• Velocity of the body at any instant V  u 2  g 2 t 2  2ugt sin

u sin   gt
• Angle made by the velocity vector with the horizontal is given by, tan  
u cos 
Note: In a projectile motion,  is obtuse while the body ascends; 900 at the topmost point and it is acute
while the body descends where  is the angle between

• For a projectile
2u sin 
1. Time of flight, T 
g
u 2 sin 2 
2. Maximum height attained H max 
2g
u 2 sin 2
3. Horizontal range R 
g
2
4. Maximum horizontal range R max  u
g
Note:1
A projectile attains maximum range when projected at an angle 450
Note: 2
Rmax and Hmax are related as Rmax = 4 Hmax
Note : 3
For two angles of projection,  and (90 -  )
1. R1 = R2; the ranges are equal
T1
2.  tan 
T2

27
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2R
3. T1T2 
g
H1
4.  tan 2 
H2

5. R  4 H1H 2
• Change in momentum between
1. The point of landing and point of projection = -2 mu sin 
2. The topmost point and point of projection = -mu sin 
II HORIZONTAL PROJECTILE
A body projected with an initial horizontal velocity. Initial vertical velocity is zero
• For a horizontal projectile,

2H
(a) Time of flight T=
g
2H
(b) Horizontal range R = u
g
Note :1
Horizontal velocity remains constant throughout the motion; vertical velocity goes on increasing
Note :2
For a body thrown horizontally, time taken to reach the ground is independent of initial velocity of
projection.

Velocity at any instant is given by V  u 2  g 2 t 2

gt
Angle made by the velocity vector with the horizontal is given by tan  
u
gx 2
Equation of trajectory of the projectile is y 
2u 2
CIRCULAR MOTION
Uniform Circular Motion
The body executing circular motion has constant speed. But the velocity goes on changing continu-
ously.

• Angular displacement - the angle swept by the radius vector. Unit is rad

• Angular velocity,   d dt . Unit is rad/sec

d d 2 
• Angular acceleration    . Unit is rad/s2
dt dt 2

28
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Note
  
Linear velocity and angular velocity are related as V   r
• Change in velocity
  
Change in velocity is given by V  V2  V1  V12  V22  2V1V2Cos

For uniform circular motion, V1  V2  V V  2V sin  2  

• Time period (T) - the time taken by a body to complete one revolution.
• Frequency ( ) - number of revolutions per second

2
• Angular velocity    2
T
  
Note: Linear acceleration and angular acceleration are related as a   r
• Centripetal acceleration - acceleration acting on a body executing uniform circular motion
2
ac  v  r2  v
r
• Centripetal force is given by Fc  ma c

mv 2
Fc   mr2  mv
r
• Work done by a centripetal force W  F.d  Fd cos  FdCos90  0

Centripetal force in different situations

Situation Centripetal force
A particle tied to a string and whirled in a circle Tension in the string
Vehicle taking a turn on a level road Frictional force
Revolution of earth around sun Gravitational force
Electron revolving around a nucleus in an atom Coulomb force of attraction
A charged particle describing a circular path
Lorentz force
in a magnetic field

Note
Angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular momentum and torque are axial vectors.
Non-Uniform circular motion
In a non-uniform circular motion, both magnitude and direction of velocity continuously change. An
additional acceleration called tangential acceleration also acts in this case.

The resultant acceleration is given by a  a c2  a t2

29
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

1. A unit vector of a vector A

1) has magnitude equal to one unit 2) is in the same plane as that of A

3) is hving the same direction of A 4) all of these
   
2. Resultant of non-zero vectors A and B makes angle  and  with A and B , respectively.. If
 
A  B , then


 B
1)  2)  3)    4) None of these
A

3. The minimum number of unequal vectors which can give zero resultant are
1) two 2) three 3) four 4) more than four

4. Two forces 3N and 2N are at an a angle  such that the resultant is R. The first force is now increased
to 6N and the resultant becomes 2R. The value of  is

1) 300 2) 600 3) 900 4) 1200

    
5. The angle between P and resultant of P  Q and P  Q is

1) 00 2) 300 3) 450 4) 600

 
6. The unit vector perpendicular to the vectors A  4iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ and B   ˆi  3jˆ  8kˆ is

1)
7

1 ˆ ˆ
3i  6 j  2kˆ  2)
7

1 ˆ ˆ
3i  6j  2kˆ  3)
49

1 ˆ ˆ
3i  6 j  2kˆ  4)
49

1 ˆ ˆ
3i  5j  2kˆ 
7. A bird is flying towards north with a velocity 40 km/h and a train is moving with a velocity 40 km/h
towards east. What is the velocity of the bird noted by a man in the train?

1) 40 2 km / h N  E 2) 40 2 km / h S  E

3) 40 2 km / h N  W 4) 40 2 km / h S  W

8. A man running at a speed of 5km h-1 finds that the rain falls vertically. When he stops running he finds
that the rain is falling at an angle of 600 with the horizontal. The velocity of rain with respect to running
man is

5 5 3 4 3
1) km h 1 2) km h 1 3) km h 1 4) 5 3 kmh 1
3 2 5

30
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

9. A boat which has a speed of 5 km/h in still water crosses a river of width 1km along the shortest
possible path in 15 min. The velocity of the river water in Km per hour is

1) 1 2) 3 3) 4 4) 41
10. A boy throws a ball upward with velocity v0 = 20 m/s making an angle  with the vertical. The wind
imparts a horizontal acceleration of 4m/s2 to the left. The angle at which the ball must be thrown so
that the ball returns to the boy’s hand is (g = 10 m/s2)

1) tan 1.2  2) tan  0.2  3) tan  2  4) tan  0.4 

1 1 1 1

11. An arrow is short into air. Its range is 200 m and its time of flight is 5s. If g = 10 ms-2, then horizontal
component of velocity of the arrow is
1) 25.0 ms-1 2) 31.25 ms-1 3) 35 ms-1 4) 40 ms-1
12. A projectile is projected at 10 ms-1 by making an angle 600 to the horizontal. After some time, its
velocity makes an angle of 300 to the horizontal. Its speed at this instant is

10 5
1) 2) 10 3 3) 4) 5 3
3 3

13. The height y and the distance x along the horizontal plane of a projectile on a certain planet (with no
 
surrounding atmosphere) are given by y  8t  5t m and x  6t m , where t is in seconds. Find the
2

initial velocity of the projectile

1) 6ms-1 2) 8 ms-1
3) 10 ms-1 4) Data is not sufficient
14. Two bodies are projected from ground with equal speeds 20 ms-1 from the same position in the same
vertical plane to have equal range but at different angles above the horizontal. If one of the angles is
300, then the sum of their maximum heights is (g = 10 ms-2).
1) 20m 2) 30m 3) 40m 4) zero

31
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. A cart is moving horizontally along a straight line with constant speed 30m/s. A projectile is to be fired
from the moving cart in such a way that it will return to the cart after the cart has moves 80m. At what
speed (relative to the cart) must the projectile be fired. (Take g = 10 m/s2)

40
1) 10 m/s 2) 10 8 m / s 3) m/s 4) none of these
3

16. The ceiling of a hall is 60m high. For maximum horizontal distance, the angle at which the ball may be
thrown with a speed of 40ms-1 without hitting the ceiling of the hall is

1) 250 2) 300 3) 450 4) 600

17. An aeroplane is flying horizontally with a velocity of 600 km/h at a height of 1960 m. When it is
vertically at a point A on the ground, a bomb is released from it. The bomb strikes the ground at point
B. The distance AB is

1) 1200 m 2) 0.33km 3) 3.33 km 4) 33 km

18. Two tall buildings are 30 m apart. The speed with which a ball must be thrown horizontally from a
window 150m above the ground in one building so that it enters a window 27.5m from the ground in
the other building is

1) 2 m/s 2) 6 m/s 3) 4 m/s 4) 8 m/s

19. A particle is moving along a circular path with a constant speed of 10 m/s. What is the magnitude of
the change in velocity of the particle when it moves through an angle of 600 around the centre of the
circle?

1) 10 3 m / s 2 2) 0 3) 10 2 ms 1 4) 10ms 1

20. A particle moves in a circle of radius 30cm. Its linear speed is given by v = 2t, where t is in second
and v is in ms-1. Find out its radial and tangential acceleration at t= 3s, respectively

1) 110 ms-2, 10 ms-2 2) 120 ms-2, 2 ms-2 3) 100 ms-2, 5 ms-2 4) 220 ms-2, 50 ms-2

Statement Questions

Read the following questions and give your answer using the following options

1) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement - 2 is correct explanation for Statement - 1

2) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement -2 is not correct explanation for Statement -1

3) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false

4) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true

21. Statement -1 : A body is thrown with a velocity u inclined to the horizontal at some angle. It moves
along a parabolic path and falls to the ground. Linear momentum of the body, during its motion, will
remain conserve.

Statement-2 : Throughout the motion of the body, a constant force acts on it.

32
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

22. A projectile moves from the ground such that its horizontal displacement is x = Kt and vertical
displacement is y  Kt 1  t  , where K and  are constants and t is time. The maximum height

K
attained by the body is . Then the value of n is
n

23. A ball rolls off the top of a stairway with a horizontal velocity of magnitude 1.8 ms-1. The steps are 0.20
m high and 0.20m wide. Which step will the ball hit first? (g = 10 ms-2)

24. A ball is projected from the ground at angle  with the horizontal. After 1s it is moving at angle 450 with
the horizontal and after 2s if is moving horizontally. If the velocity of projection of the ball is 10 n m / s
then the value of n is?

25. A particle is projected from a point A with velocity u 2 at an angle of 450 with horizontal as shown in
xu
figure. It strikes the plane BC at right angles. The velocity of the particle at the time of collision is .
3
The value of x is ?

33
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 04
LAWS OF MOTION

SYNOPSIS
• Inertia of rest is the inability of body to change its state of rest by itself, while inertia of motion is the
inability of the body to change its state of motion by itself.
• Inertia of direction is the inability of the body to change its direction of motion by itself.
• Newton’s first law of motion gives the definition of force and the concept of inertia.
• The quantity of motion possessed by a body is called momentum. It is measured by the product of
mass and velocity.
• Newton’s second law says that the rate of change of momentum is directly proportional to the
applied force.
• Force is an external effort in the form of push or pull which (i) one produces or tries to produce motion
in a body at rest, or (ii) stops or tries to stop a moving body, or (iii) changes or tries to change the
direction of motion of the body.
• Frictional force, tensional force, normal force, air resistance force, applied force and spring force are
contact forces.
• Gravitational force, electrical force, weak force are action-at-a distance forces.
• The force between two static charges is called electrostatic force.
• The force between two magnetic poles is called magnetic force.
  
• If F1 , F2 , F3 .... are the concurrent forces acting on the same point, then the point will be in equilibrium
  
if F1  F2  F3  .........  0 .

• Impulse is the measure of the degree to which an external force produces a change in momentum of
the body. The product of a large force acting on a body for a small interval is called impulse.
• Newton’s third law of motion says that to every action has equal and opposite reaction. Action and
reaction act on different bodies and they are simultaneous.
• Action and reaction never cancel each other.
• The law of conservation of linear momentum is a logical consequence of Newton’s second law.
• If n bullets each of mass m and velocity v are fired from a gun then the average force acting on the
gun is mnv.
• Principle of conservation of momentum follows from Newton’s first law of motion.
• Newton’s third law contains law of conservation of momentum.

34
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)


p
• In case of a uniform circular motion, the change in momentum with time is not zero, i.e.  0 but
t
p  0 .
• When the lift is at rest or in uniform motion, then the weight recorded by the spring balance is equal
to the actual weight of the body.
• When the lift is accelerated up, then the weight recorded by the spring balance is more than the
actual weight of the body.
• When the lift is accelerated down, the weight recorded by the spring balance is less than the actual
weight of the body.
• For a lift falling freely, acceleration of the lift is g and hence the body will feel weightlessness.
• The spring balance will record an increase in weight for a moment, when the lift starts to move up and
then with uniform velocity will record the actual weight of the boy.
• If no external force acts on a system of two or more bodies, then the total momentum of the system
remains constant. This is known as the principle of conservation of momentum.
• Thrust on the rocket at any instant is equal to the product of the exhaust speed of the burnt gases and
the rate of combustion of fuel at that instant.

 dM 
i.e. F   u  
 dt 
-ve sign indicates that thrust on the rocket is in a direction opposite to the direction of escaping gas.

 M0 
• Velocity of rocket at any instant t, when mass of the rocket is M, is given by v  v 0  u log e  ,
 M 
where v0 is the initial velocity of the rocket. If the initial velocity of the rocket is zero, then
M 
v  u log e  0 
 M 

 M0 
If effect of gravity is also taken into account, then v 0  u log e    gt .
 M 
Friction
• Force of friction opposes relative motion of the point of contact with respect to the surface.
• Force of friction acts parallel to the surface.
• The number of frictional forces acting on a body depends upon the number of contact surfaces. For
every contact surface, there is a frictional force.
• Frictional forces are produced on account of intermolecular interactions between the two bodies or
surfaces.
• Frictional force is a self adjusting force which increases with increasing applied force till the body is at
rest but on the point of motion.
• For frictional force, the relative motion between two bodies or surfaces is not necessary. In fact,
contact between two bodies or surfaces is necessary.
35
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Type of frictional forces

• Static friction: It is a self adjusting force with an upper limit called the limiting friction.
• Dynamic friction/kinetic friction.
• Sliding friction
• Rolling Friction
• Rolling friction < dynamic friction < sliding friction

• If s  coefficient of static friction, R=N=normal reaction, then static frictional force <  s R (body is at
rest). Limiting friction=  s R (body is on point of motion).

• If  k = coefficient of kinetic friction, then kinetic frictional force =  k R (body is in motion).

• The limiting frictional force between two surfaces in contact with each other depends only on 
(nature of the surfaces) and normal contact force R. It does not depend on their shape, size or
surface area.
Tension
• Tension force always pulls a body.
• Tension can never push a body or rope.
• Tension across a massless pulley or frictionless pulley remains constant.
• Rope becomes slack when tension force becomes zero.
• When a rope is pulled by a force, the rope becomes tight or taut. This conveys the concept of tension.
Contact force-Motion of bodies in contact
(a) Two bodies in contact

A force F is applied on mass m1 horizontally. Masses m1 and m2 are in contact. Contact force between
m1 and m2 = F. Contact force is that force with which one body presses the other at the point of
contact when the two bodies are placed on a frictionless surface.

Force applied to system

 Acceleration a = mass of system
F
a 
 m1  m2 
m1F
 Contact force on m1 and m1a=  m  m 
1 2

mF mF
Contact force on m2=m2a= m  m ’ or F  m 2 a  m  m
2 2

 1 2  1 2
36
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

(b) Three bodies in contact

Force applied on the system = F

Mass of the system = m1+m2+m3
Acceleration of the system=a

F
 Acceleration of each mass(a)=  m  m  m 
1 2 3

Contact force between m1 and m2=F1

Contact force between m2 and m3=F2
For first body, F–F1=m1a
For second body, F1–F2=m2a
For third body, F2=m3a

m1F  m 2  m3  F
 F1  F  m1a  F  
 m1  m 2  m 3   m1  m 2  m3 
m3 F
 F2  m3a 
 m1  m2  m3 
(c) Motion of bodies connected by strings

Acceleration in system=a

F m3F
a  Tension T1  m3a 
 m1  m2  m3   m1  m 2  m3 

 m 2  m3  F
Tension T2   m 2  m 3  a 
 m1  m 2  m3
Tension T3=F

37
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

• Consider a body of mass m2 which rests on a surface which is horizontal. Let a string passing over a
pulley connect m2 with mass m1 as shown in figure.

a) without friction between m2 and horizontal table,

mg
Acceleration, a  m  m
1

 1 2
mm g
Tension, T  m  m
1 2

 1 2
b) With friction between body m2 and table,

 m1  m 2  g m1m 2 1    g
Acceleration, a  Tension, T 
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2 
• Two masses are suspended as shown in figure.

The block on horizontal table moves towards right with acceleration a.

m1g–T1=m1a ..................... (i)
T2–m2g=m2a .......................(ii)

 m1  m 2  g
T1–T2=Ma .........................(iii) we get, acceleration, a 
 m1  m 2  M 
m1  2m 2  M  g
Tension T1 
 m1  m 2  M 
m 2  2m1  M  g
Tension T2 
 m1  m 2  M 
38
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

• Two masses are suspended over a pulley on an inclined plane as shown in the figure. The mass m1
descends with an acceleration a. Mass m2 is on inclined plane.

With friction
 m1  m 2  sin    cos    g
Acceleration, a =
m1  m 2
1  sin    cos   g
Tension T = m1m 2 
m1  m 2
Without friction
 m1  m 2 sin   g;Tension, T  m1m 2 1  sin   g
Acceleration, a 
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2 
• Masses m1 and m2 are connected by a string passing over a pulley such that m1 > m2
 m1 sin   m 2 sin   g
Acceleration a =
m1  m 2
m1m 2  sin   sin   g
Tension T =
m1  m 2

Motion on an inclined plane

The inclined plane may be rough or smooth. A body may move down the plane or up the plane.
(i) Motion of a body down the rough plane:

39
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Normal reaction R  mg cos 

mg sin   R  ma

 mg sin   mg cos   ma or a  g  sin    cos  

 Acceleration down the rough plane  g(sin    cos )

(ii) Motion of a body down the smooth plane :    0 

 Acceleration of body = g sin  .

(iii) Motion of a body up the rough plane :

When the body moves up the plane, the force of friction F  R acts down the plane to oppose the
motion.

 ma  mg sin   F  mg sin   R

 mg sin   mg cos   mg  sin   cos  . or acceleration a  g  sin    cos  

v) Plane is given horizontal acceleration, plane is smooth

mg cos   mb cos   ma  a   g sin   b cos  

If a  0, b  g tan  .

40
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. A force of 5N gives a mass M1 an acceleration equal to 8m/s2 and M2, an accelereation equal to
24m/s2. What is the acceleration if both masses are combined together?

1) 16 m/s2 2) 6m/s2 3) 12 m/s2 4) 4 m/s2

2. If a bullet of mass 5gm moving with velocity 100m/sec, penetrates the wooden block upto 6cm. Then
the average force imposed by the bullet on the block is

1) 8300N 2) 417 N 3) 830 N 4) zero

3. A and B are two nails on a horizontal line, AC, BC are two uniform strings from which a weight of 100N
is suspended. The tension in (N) in AC is

1) 100 N 2) 80N 3) 60N 4) 50N

4. A light string passing over a smooth light pulley connects two blocks of masses m1 and m2 (vertically).
g
If the acceleration of the system is then the ratio of the masses is
8

1) 8:1 2) 9 : 7 3) 4 : 3 4) 5 : 3

5. A person is standing in an elevator, in which situation he finds his weight less than actual when

1) The elevator moves upward with constant acceleration

2) The elevator moves downward with constant acceleration

3) The elevator moves upward with uniform velocity

4) The elevator moves downward with uniform velocity

41
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

6. A rocket has an initial mass of 20  103 kg . If it is to blast off with an initial acceleration of 4ms-2, the
initial thrust needed is (g = 10ms-2)

1) 6  10 4 N 2) 28  10 4 N 3) 20  104 N 4) 12  104 N

7. A block is released on smooth inclined plane of inclination  . The time at which it will reach bottom is

1 2h 2 2h 3 2h 4 2h
1) 2) 3) 4)
sin  g sin  g sin  g sin  g

8. The rod of length L and mass M is acted on by two unequal forces F1 and F2(F2< F1) as shown in the
following figure. The tension in the rod at a distance x from the end A is given by

 x Fx  x x x
1) F1 1    2) F2 1    F1   3)  F1  F2 
2
4) None of these
 L L  L   
L L

9. A 0.5kg ball moving with speed of 12m/s strikes a hard wall at an angle of 300 with the wall, it is
reflected with the same speed and at the same angle. If the ball is in contact with the wall for 0.25
seconds, the average force acting on the wall is

1) 24N 2) 12 N 3) 96N 4) 48 N

42
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

10. Two blocks are connected by a spring. The combination is suspended, at rest from a ceiling as
shown. The string breaks suddenly. Immediately after the string breaks, what is the initial downward
acceleration of the upper block of mass 2M.

3g
1) 0 2) 3) g 4) 2g
2

11. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth inclined wedge ABC of inclination  as shown in the figure.
The wedge is given an acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation between a and  for the block
to remain stationary on the wedge is

g g
1) a= 2) a= 3) a  g tan  4) a  g cos 
cosecθ sin 
12. A 5000kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The exhaust speed is 800ms-1. To give an initial upward
acceleration of 20 ms-2, the amount of gas ejected per second to supply the needed thrust will be
(g = 10ms-2)

1) 127-5 kg s-1 2) 187. 5 kg s-1 3) 185.5 kg s-1 4) 137.5 kg s-1

43
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

13. A block of mass 5kg is on a rough horizontal surface and is at rest. Now a force of 24N is imparted to
it with negligible impulse. If the coefficient of kinetic friction if 0.4 and g = 9.8 m/s2, then the acceleration
of the block is
1) 0.26 m/s2 2) 0.39 m/s2 3) 0.69 m/s2 4) 0.88 m/s2
14. A vehicle of mass m is moving on a rough horizontal road with momentum P. If the coefficient of
friction between the tyres and the road be  , then the stopping distance is

P P2 P P2
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 mg 2 mg 2 m 2g 2 m 2 g

15. A block of mass m is in contact with the cart C as shown in the figure. The coefficient of static friction
between the block and the cart is  . The acceleration  of the cart that will prevent the block from
falling satisfies

g g mg g
1)   2)   3)   4)  
   m

16. The minimum force required to start pushing a body up along a rough (frictional coefficient  ) inclined
plane is F1 while the minimum force needed to prevent it from sliding dowm is F2. If the inclined plane
F1
makes an angle  from the horizontal such that tan   2 , then the ratio
F2 is

1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 4
17. A system of three masses A, B and C shown in figure is pushed by a force F. All surfaces are smooth
except between B and C. Static frictional coefficient between B and C is m. Minimum value of F to
prevent block B from down ward slipping is

3mg 5mg 5mg 3 mg

1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
44
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

18. A block of mass 2kg is placed on a truck as shown in figure. The coefficient of kinetic friction between
the block and surface is 0.5. The truck starts from rest and moves with acceleration 8m/s2. After how
much time the block fall off the truck.

1) 4s 2) 3s 3) 2s 4) 1.5s s

19. A bend in a level road has a radius of 100m. Find the maximum speed which a car turning this bend
may have without skidding  3  0.8 
1) 25 m/s 2) 26 m/s 3) 28 m/s 4) None
Statements Questions
1) Both statement I and statement II are true and statement II is the correct explantion of statement I
2) Both statement I and statement II are true but statement II is not the correct explanation of
statement I
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
4) Statement I is false and statement II is true
20. Statement I : A cloth covers a table. Some dishes are kept on it. The cloth can be pulled out without
disloding the dishes from the table
Statement II : For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction
21. Statement I : It is easier to pull a heavy object than to push it on a level ground
Statement II : The magnitude of frictional force depends on the nature of the two surfaces in contact.

SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
22. In the figure a painter of mass 100kg standing in a crate of mass 25kg pulls himself up with the crate
with an acceleration. If the painter exerts an effective force of 450 N on the floor of the crate. Then the
acceleration of the man is. [in m/s2]

45
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

23. The coefficient of static friction between a wooden block of mass 0.5kg and a vertical rough wall is
0.2. The magnitude of horizontal force that should be applied on the block to keep it adhere to the wall
will be ....................N[g=10 ms-2]

24. Two blocks (m = 0.5kg and M = 4.5 kg) are arranged on a horizontal frictionless table as shown in the
3
figure. The coefficient of static friction between the two blocks is . Then the maximum horizontal
7
force that can be applied on the larger block so that the blocks move together is ...........M(Round off
to the nearest integer) [ Take g as 9.8 ms-2]

25. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The minimum value of m (in kg) so that block do not move
is

46
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 05
WORK ENERGY POWER

SYNOPSIS
Work is said to be done when a force F displaces its point of application. Workdone is measured as
 
W  F . S FS cos  .

Unit of work:- Joule (J) in SI and erg in CGS system. Gravitational unit of work is kg.m. 1kgm = 9.8 J
1 J = 107 ergs. Dimensions ML2T-2
 
If  = 0 F and S are along the same direction. Work done W = FS is maximum.
 
If  = 900, F and S are perpendicular to each other. Work done by the force is zero. ie,

W = FS cos  = 0

If  < 900, W = FS cos  work done is positive: work is said to be done by the force

If  > 900, w = FS cos  work done is negative: work is said to be done against the force
Retarding force performs negative work. Accelerating force performs positive work.
Calculation of work:

(i) For constant force, W  F.S
(ii) For uniformly varying force, W = Average force  Displacement
 
(iii) For non-uniformly varying force and in general, W   F.ds

The area under force - displacement graph gives the work done.
Energy of a body is the capacity for doing work. It is measured in terms of work. So the units and dimensions
of energy are the same as those of work.
Mechanical energy exists in two forms:
(1) Kinetic energy - possessed by virtue of motion

1 P2
KE = mv2  P  mv
2 2m

Work - Energy Principle: W  KE Work done by all forces =  KE

47
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

(2) Potential energy is the energy possessed by virtue of position, or state of strain.

Gravitational PE = mgh. (by virtue of position)

1
Elastic PE (of a stretched spring or body) = kx 2 - the energy possessed due to the state of strain
2

where k is the force constant (or, spring constant), x is the stretching length or strain produced.

F mg
k 
x x

For an elastic spring the stretching force F = +kx

1 2
Work done in stretching = kx . This amount of work will be stored in the spring as its elastic PE.
2

Conservation of Mechanical Energy

Total energy is conserved in a mechanical system if the force acting is conservative. ie; KE + PE = a
constant.

 
 
Power is the rate of doing work. P  W  F . s  F . v .
t t

dW
If F is varying Pinst 
dt

Unit: - Watt (W) = Joule/s. Dimension ML2T-3

Kilowatt (kW) = 103 W

Another commonly used unit of power is horse power (HP)

1 HP = 746 W

Kilo watt - hour (kWh) is the commonly used unit of energy. It is the energy consumed at the rate of 1
kJ/s in one hour.

 1 kWh = 1000 x 60 x 60 J = 3.6 x 106 J

Energy in kWh = Power in kW x time in hour.

COLLISION

Elastic and inelastic collisions.

Elastic collision 1. Total linear momentum is conserved

2. Total KE is conserved

3. TE is conserved

4. Forces involved during collision are conservative

48
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

In the case of a linear elastic collision

m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2

1 1 1 1
m1 u12  m2 u 22  m1v12  m2 v 22
2 2 2 2

v1 
2 m2 u 2

b
m1  m 2 u1 g
Solving , m1  m 2 b g
m1  m 2 ................(1)

2m1u1  m  m1  u 2 .............. 2
v2   2  
m1  m 2  m1  m 2 
v2 - v1 = u1 - u2 ..................................(3)
Relative velocity of separation = Relative velocity of approach
Special cases
(1) If m1 = m2 v1 = u2, v2 = u1 velocities interchange after collision
(2) If m1 >> m2 and u2 = 0, then v1 = u1 and v2 = 2 u1
(3) If m1 << m2 and u2 = 0, then v1 = -u1 and v2 = 0
Inelastic collision
(1) Total Linear momentum is conserved
(2) Total energy is conserved
(3) There is a loss of KE
(4) Some or all the forces involved during collision are non-conservative.
Coefficient of restitution
A ball moving with a velocity u1 collides inelastically with another body moving with a velocity u2 in the
same direction and after collision if their velocities are v1 and v2 respectively, then,

b
v 2  v1  e u1  u 2 g where, e is the coefficient of restitution

v 2  v1 relative velocity of seperation

e 
u1  u 2 relative velocity of approach .......(4) The value of e lies between 0 and 1.

When a ball falls on a hard floor from a height h1 with a velocity u and rebounds with a velocity v to a
v h2
height h2 then, it can be shown that e  ...........(5) and also, e  ........... 6 
u h1

Conservation of energy
Total energy is conserved
When a mass m is fully converted into energy, the energy produced E = mc2

49
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I
g
1. A bucket tied to a string is lowered at a constant acceleration of . If the mass of the bucket is M and
4
is lowered by a distance d, then the work done by the string will be (Assume the string to be massless)
1 3 4 4
1) Mgd 2)  Mgd 3)  Mgd 4) Mgd
4 4 3 3
2. A ball is released from the top of a tower. The ratio of work done by force of gravity in 1st, 2nd and 3rd
second of the motion of the ball is
1) 1:2:3 2) 1:4:9 3) 1:3:5 4) 1:5:3
L
3. A uniform chain is held on a frictionless table with hanging over the edge. Knowing total mass of
4
the chain is M and total length is L, the work required to pull the hanging part back to the table is
MgL MgL MgL MgL
1) 2) 3) 4)
16 8 32 24
4. The graph shows the acceleration of a 3kg particle as an applied force moves it from rest along x-
axis. The total work done by the force on the particle by the time the particle reaches x = 6 m is equal
to

1) 20J 2) 30J 3) 40J 4) 60J

5. A block of 1kg is placed at A of a rough track shown in the figure. If slightly pushed towards right, it
stops at point B of the track. The work done by the frictional force is (g = 10 m/s2)

1) -5J 2) -10 J 3) -2J 4) -8J

50
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

6. A body is moving with a speed of 1m/s and a constant force F is needed to stop it at distance x. If the
speed of body is 3m/s, then constant force needed to stop it at the same distance x would be
1) 1.5F 2) 3F 3) 6F 4) 9F
7. A small particle slides along a track with elevated ends and a flat central part as shown in the figure.
The flat part has a length 3m. The curved portions of the track are frictionless, but for the flat part the
coefficient of kinetic friction is   0.2 . The particle is released at point A which is at a height h = 1.5m
above the flar part of the track. The position where the particle finally come to rest is

1) left to mid point of the flat part 2) right to the mid point of the flat part
3) mid point of the flat part 4) none of these

8. A particle is released from a height H. At certain height its kinetic energy is two times its potential
energy. Height and speed of the particle at that instant, respectively, are

H 2 gH H gH 2 H 2 gH H
1) , 2) ,2 3) , 4) , 2 gH
3 3 3 3 3 3 3

9. A 16 kg block moving on a frictionless horizontal surface with a velocity of 4m/s compresses an ideal
spring and comes to rest. if the force constant of the spring is 100N/m, then how much is the spring
compressed?

1) 1.7m 2) 1.6m 3) 1.4m 4) 1.8 m

10. A bead of mass 0.2kg is released from rest at point A on a fixed wedge of height 1m . It leaves the
wedge at point B. What is the speed of the bead at the moment before it hits the ground?

1) 3.86 ms-1 2) 5.47 ms-1 3) 4.47 ms-1 4) 6.14 ms-1

51
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. The potential energy versus displacement graph of a system is represented in the figure below. The
force acting on the system will be represented by

1) 2)

3) 4)

9 2
12. The potential energy of a body is given by U   . The position at which its speed can be maximum
x2 x
is
1) x = +3m 2) x = -3m 3) x = 9m 4) x = -9m
13. A block of 8kg accelerates uniformly from rest to a velocity of 4ms in 40s. The instantaneous power
-1

at the end of 8s is
1) 0.64 W 2) 0.32 W 3) 0.16 W 4) 0.68 W

3t 2
14. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2kg varies with time as P  watt . Here, tis time in seconds.
2
If velcoity of the particle at t= 0 is v = 0 m/s, then the velocity of particle at time t =2 s will be
1) 1 m/s 2) 4 m/s 3) 2 m/s 4) 2 2m / s

52
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

15. A particle of mass m is moving with horizontal speed 6m/s as shown in the figure. If m << M, then for
one dimensional elastic collision, the speed of lighter particle after collision will be

1) 2 m/s in original direction 2) 2m/s opposite to the original direction

3) 4m/s opposite to the original direction 4) 4 m/s in original direction

16. A ball moving with velocity 2 m/s collides head on with another stationary ball of double the mass. If
the coefficient of restitution is 0.5, then their velocities (in m/s) after collision will be

1) 0,1 2) 1,1 3) 1, 0.5 4) 0,2

17. A block of mass 0.50 kg is moving with a speed of 2.00ms-1 on a smooth surface. It strikes another
mass of 1.00 kg at rest and then they move together as a single body. The energy loss during the
collision is

1) 1.00 J 2) 0.67 J 3) 0.34 J 4) 0.16 J

18. A particle of mass m begins to slide down a fixed smooth sphere from the top. What is its tangential
acceleration when it breaks off the sphere?

2g 5g g
1) 2) 3) g 4)
3 3 3

10
19. A stone of mass 1kg tied to a light inextensible string of length L  m , is whirling in a circular path
3
in a vertical plane. The ratio of maximum tension in the string to the minimum tension in the string is
4. If g is taken to be 10 m/s2, the speed of the stone at the highest point of the circle is

1) 10 m/s 2) 5 2 m / s 3) 10 3 m / s 4) 20 m/s

20. A block follows the path as shown in the figure from height h.If radius of circular path is r, then the
relation which holds good to complete full circle is

5r 5r 5r 5r
1) h  2) h  3) h  4) h 
2 2 2 2

53
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions


21. An object is moving along a straight line path from P to Q under the action of a force F  (4iˆ  3ˆj  2k)
ˆ N.
If the co-ordinate of P & Q in metre are (3, 2, -1) & (2, -1, 4) respectively. Find the work done by the
force in J.

22. Under the action of force, 2kg body moves such that its position x as a function of time t is given by

t3
x , x is in metre and t in second. Calculate the work done by the force in the first 2 second in J.
3

23. A partcile of mass m moving in the x-direction with speed 2v is hit by another particle of mass 2m
moving in the y-direction with speed v. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the percentage loss in the
energy during the collision is close to

24. A rod of length 2 m and mass 0.5 kg is fixed at one end and allowed to hang vertically from a rigid
support. Find the work done (in J) in raising the other end of the rod until it makes an angle of 600 with
the vertical.(g = 10ms–2).

25. The bob of a stationary pendulum is given a sharp hit to impart it a horizontal speed of 3g . The

1  1 
angle rotated by the string before it becomes slack is cos   , where x is
 x 

54
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 06
SYSTEM OF PARTICLES AND
RIGID BODY ROTATION
SYNOPSIS

Rigid body

• Ideally a rigid body is a body with a perfectly definite and unchanging shape

• The distance between different points of such a body do not change

• No real body is truly rigid

Centre of Mass

• The centre of mass of a body is a point where the whole mass of the body is supposed to be concentrated

• Position vector of the centre of mass

  
 m1 r1  m 2 r2  .......  m n rn
rcm = m1  m 2  ......  m n

• Co-ordinates of the centre of mass

m1x1  m 2 x 2  ......  m n x n
X cm 
m1  m 2  ......  m n

m1y1  m 2 y 2  ......  m n y n
Ycm 
m1  m 2  ......  m n

m1z1  m 2 z 2  ......  m n z n
Zcm 
m1  m 2  ......  m n

• The sum of the moments of masses of all the particles of the body about the centre of mass is zero

n 
m r 0
i 1
i i

 Xdm
, Ycm  
Ydm
, Z cm  
Zdm
• Centre of mass of a continuous mass distribution X cm 
 dm  dm  dm
55
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Centre of mass of two particle system

 m2 
r1   d
 m1  m 2 

 m1 
r2   d
 m1  m 2 

• The position of centre of mass of a body depends on the shape, size and distribution of mass within
the body
• The centre of mass does not lie necessarily within the object
• In symmetrical bodies with homogeneous distribution of mass centre of mass coincides with the
geometrical centre
• The centre of mass changes its position in translatory motion but remains unchanged in rotatory
motion about an axis through the centre of mass
• The centre of gravity has no relevance where there is no force of gravity, where as the centre of mass
is independent of gravitational forces
Centre of mass of some homogeneous bodies
A triangular plate

at the centroid

A rectangular plate A semi-circular ring

56
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

A semi-circular disc A hemispherical shell

A solid hemisphere A circular Cone

(Solid) (Hollow)

h h
Y Y
4 3

Motion of Centre of Mass

• Velocity of centre of mass

  
 m1 v1  m 2 v 2  ........  m n v n
V cm 
m1  m 2  .......  m n

• Acceleration of centre of mass

  
 m1 a1  m 2 a 2  ........  m n a n
a cm 
m1  m 2  .......  m n

• Total momentum of the system of particles

 
P  MV cm

• The centre of mass of the system of particles moves as if all the mass of the system was concentrated
at the centre of mass and all the external forces were applied at that point.
 
Ma cm  F ext

• When no external force acts on a body its centre of mass will remain either at rest or move with a
constant velocity.

57
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Moment of Inertia
• Moment of inertia gives a measurement of the resistance of a body to a change in its rotational motion.
• Moment of inertia of a body about an axis depends on the mass as well as its distribution about that
axis.
• For a single particle of mass m rotating about an axis at a distance r from the axis
I = mr2

• For a system of particles about an axis I = mr 2


2
• For a rigid body rotating about an axis I = r dm

• Radius of gyration of a body about an axis may be defined as the distance from the axis to a mass
point whose mass is equal to the mass of the whole body and whose moment of inertia is equal to the
moment of inertia of the body about the axis.
Parallel Axes Theorem
The moment of inertia of a body about any axis is equal to the sum of the moment of inertia of the
body about a parallel axis passing through its centre of mass and the product of its mass and the
square of the distance between two parallel axes.

Perpendicular Axes Theorem

Moment of inertia of a planar body (lamina) about an axis perpendicular to its plane is equal to the
sum of its moments of inertia about two perpendicular axes cuncurrent with the perpendicular axis
and lying in the plane of the lamina.

58
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Moment of inertia of some regular shaped bodies about specific axes

Body Ax is Mom e nt of Ine rtia

a) Passing through centre and MR 2

Thin circular perpendicular to the plane
ring of radius R MR2
b) Diameter
2
MR2
a) Passing through the centre and
Circular disc of perpendicular to the plane 2
radius R MR2
b) Diameter
4

a) Passing through the mid point and ML2

perpendicular to the length 12
Uniform thin rod of
length L
b) Passing through one end and ML2
perpendicular to the length
3
Solid sphere of 2
a) Diameter MR
2
radius R
5
Hollow sphere 2 2
a) Diameter MR
of radius R 3

a) Axis of cylinder MR 2
Hollow cylinder of
radius R and length L b) Passing through centre and  L2 R 2 
M  
perpendicular to length
12 2 

MR2
a) Axis of the cylinder
Solid cylinder of radius 2
R and length L b) Passing through centre and  L2 R 2 
perpendicular to length M  
12 4 

Thin rectangular plate a) Axis passing through centre and M

 l 2  b2 
of length l & bredth b perpendicular to its plane 12  

Thin square plate a) Axis passing through centre Ma 2

of side a and perpendicular to plane
6

a) Axis joining vertex to the 3 2

Cone of radius R MR
centre of the base 10

59
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Torque
• Torque or moment of force is the rotational analogue of force
• Torque or the moment of force about a point is measured as the product of force and the perpendicular
distance from the point to the line of action of the force
  
  rFsin  ;  r  F

• Torque is related to angular acceleration as   I 

Angular Momentum
• Angular momentum is the rotational analogue of linear momentum
• Angular momentum L = rpsin 
  
L  rp

dA
• Geometrical meaning of angular momentum L = 2m
dt
• Angular momentum of a rotating rigid body L = I 

dL
• Relation between torque and angular momentum  =
dt
Kinematic Equations of Rotational Motion

1
 t = 0 +  t  = 0 t +  t 2
2

t 2 = 0 2 +2  
Conservation of angular momentum
In the absence of an external torque, the angular momentum of the rotating system is conserved.
When I = 0 L = I  = constant
I1  1 = I 2  2

1 2
• Kinetic energy of a rotating rigid body KE = I
2
Rolling Motion
Rolling motion is the combination of translatory and rotatory motions

Pure translational motion

60
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Pure rotational motion

1 2
KE = Iw
2

Rolling motion

For pure rolling without slipping V = Rw

Kinetic Energy of Rolling Motion

• KETotal = KETranslation + KERotation

1 1 1  K2 
KETotal = MV2 + I  2 = Mv2 1  2 
2 2 2  R 

Motion of a body rolling down without slipping along an inclined plane

• Velocity on reaching the bottom

2gh
V


g sin 
• Acceleration down the plane a =

61
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

1 2h
• Time taken to reach the bottom t =
sin  g

I K2
Where  1  or   1 
MR 2 R2
• Minimum friction required for pure rolling
MgSin tan 
Fmin   min 
MR 2 ; MR 2
1 1
I I
Analogy between translational motion and rotational motion
Translational Motion Rotational Motion
 
1. Linear displacement r 1. Angular displacement 
 
 dr  d 
2. Linear velocity V  2. Angular velocity  
dt dt
 
 dv  d 
3. Linear Acceleration a  3. Angular acceleration  
dt dt
4. Time t 4. Time t
5. Mass m 5. Moment of inertia I
   
6. Linear momentum P  mv 6. Angular momentum L  I
   
7. Linear impulse Ft  P 7. Angular impulse =  t   L
   
8. Force F  ma 8. Torque   I
 
9. W  F.s 9. W  .

1 1
10. KE = mv2 10. KE = I 2
2 2
  
11. Power P = F.v 11. Power P = .
12. Kinematic eq. 12. Kinematic equations.
V = u + at wt = w0 +  t
S = ut + 1/2 at2   0 t  1 / 2  t 2

V2 - u2 = 2 as  t 2  0 2  2  

a 
Sn = u + (2n  1) n  0  (2n  1)
2 2

62
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. Masses 8kg, 2kg, 4kg and 2kg are placed at the corners A, B, C and D respectively, of a square ABCD
of diagonal 80cm. The distance of centre of mass from A will be
1) 20 cm 2) 30cm 3) 40 cm 4) 60 cm
2. A uniform wire of length l is bent into the shape of V as shown in the figure below. The distance of its
centre of mass from the vertex A is

l l 3 l 3
1) 2) 3) 4) none of these
2 4 8
3. Two bodies of different masses 2kg and 4kg are moving with velocities 20 m/s and 10m/s, respectively,
towards each other due to to mutual gravitational attraction. What is the velocity of their centre of
mass?
1) 5 m/s 2) 6 m/s 3) 8 m/s 4) zero
4. If the system shown below is released, then the acceleration of the centre of mass of the system is

g g
1) 2) 3) g 4) 2g
4 2

63
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. In a vertical plane inside a smooth hollow thin tube, a block of same mass as that of tube is released
as shown in the figure. When it is slightly disturbed, it moves towards right. By the time the block
reaches the right end of the tube, then the displacement of the tube will be (where R is mean radius
of tube and assume that the tube remains in vertical plane)

2R 4R R
1) 2) 3) 4) R
  2

6. The centre of mass of the shaded portion of the disc is (The mass is uniformly distributed in the
shaded portion)

R R
1) to the left of A 2) to the left of A
20 12

R R
3) to the right of A 4) to the right of A
20 12

1
7. The moment of inertia of a rod about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to it is ML2
12
(where M is the mass and L, the length of the rod). The rod is bent in the middle so that the two halves
make an angle of 600. The moment of inertiua of the bent rod about the same axis would be

1 1 1 ML3
1) ML2 2) ML2 3) ML2 4)
48 12 24 8 3

64
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

8. Four similar point masses (each of mass m) are placed on the circumference of a disk of mass M
and radius R. The moment of inertia of the system about the normal axis through the centre O will be

1 8
1) MR 2  4mR 2 2) MR 2  4mR 2 3) MR  mR
2 2
4) none of these
2 5

9. Three solid spheres of mass M and radius R are shown in the figure. The moment of inertia of the
system about xx axis will be

7 14 16 21
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) MR 2
2 5 5 5

10. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass density  is bent into a circular loop and centre O as
shown. The moment of inertia of the loop about the axis XX is

L3 L3 5L3 3L3

1) 2) 3) 4)
8 2 162 162 82

11. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder about its own axis is same as its moment of inertia about an
axis passing through its centre of gravity and perpendicular to its length. The relation between its
length L and radius R is

1) L  2 R 2) L  3 R 3) L= 3R 4) L = R

65
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

12. A constant torque of 1000N m turns a which of moment of inertia 200kg m2 about an axis through its
centre. Its angular velocity after 3s is (in rad/s)

1) 1 2) 5 3) 15 4) 10

13. A rod of length 1m is standing vertically. When its outer end touches the ground without slipping, then
the speed of other end will be

1) 19.6m / s 2) 29.4 m / s 3) 4.9 m/s 4) 9.8 m/s

14. A rigid body of mass m rotates with angular velocity  about an axis at a distance d from the centre
of mass O. The radius of gyration about a parallel axis through O is k. The kinetic energy of rotation
of the body is

1 1 1 1
mk 22 md 22 m  d 2  k 2  2 m  d  k  2
2
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2

th
1
15. If the earthwere to suddenly contract to of its present radius without any change in its mass, then
n
the duration of the new day will be nearly

24 24
1) h 2) 24 nh 3) h 4) 24n2h
n n2

16. A particle performs uniform circular motion with an angular momentum L. If the frequency of particle’s
motion is doubled and its kinetic energy is halved, the angular momentum becomes

L L
1) 2L 2) 4L 3) 4)
2 4

17. A smooth tube of certain mass is rotated in gravity free space and released. The two balls shown in
the figure move towards ends of the tube. For the whole system, which of the following quantity is not
conserved?

1) Angular momentum 2) Linear momentum

3) Kinetic energy 4) Angular speed

66
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

18. An ant is sitting at the edge of a rotating disk. If the ant reached the other end, after moving along the
diameter, the angular velocity of the disk will
1) remain constant 2) first decreases and then increases
3) first increase, the decrease 4) increase continuously
19. A disk of mass M and radius R rolls on a horizontal surface and then rolls yp an inclined plane as
shown in the figure. If the velocity of the disk is v, the height to which it can rise will be

3v2 3v2 v2 v2
1) 2) 3) 4)
2g 4g 4g 2g
20. A disk of mass M and radius R is rolling with angular speed  on a horizontal plane as shown. The
magnitude of angular momentum of the disk about the origin O is

1 3
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 3) MR 2 4) 2MR 2
2 2
SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. A solid sphere of radius R has moment of inertia I about its geometrical axis. f it is melted into a disc
of radius r and thickness t. If it’s moment of inertia about the tangential axis (which is perpendicular to
2R
plane of the disc), is also equal to I, then the value of r is equal to .Find K
K

67
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. Two uniform rods of equal length but different masses are rigidly joined to form an L-
shaped body, which is then pivoted about O as shown. If in equilibrium the body is in the
shown configuration, ratio M/m is K 1/2.Find K.

23. For equilibrium of the system, value of mass m should be (in Kg)

12kg m 3kg

I
I I/2

24. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving with a uniform speed 3 2 m/s in XOY plane along the line Y = X +
4. The magnitude of its angular momentum about the origin is
(in Kg m2 s-1).
25. A string is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 5 kg and radius 0.5 m. If the string is n o w

pulled with a horizontal force of 40 N, and the cylinder is rolling without slipping on a horizontal

surface (see figure), then the angular acceleration of the cylinder in rad/s2 will be (Neglect the

mass and thickness of the string) :-

68
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 07
GRAVITATION

SYNOPSIS
Newton’s Law of Gravitation

m1m 2
FG
r2

G is universal constant G  6.67 10 11 Nm 2 kg 2

Gravitational force is attractive, central, conservative, weakest and independent of medium. It also
obeys inverse square law and principle of superposition.

 G   M 1 L3 T  2
Acceleration due to gravity ‘g’

GM
On the surface of earth g 
R2

GM
At a height h from the surface of earth g h 
R  h
2

 2h  g 2h
If h  R ; g h  1  g  
 R g R

 d
At a depth d from the surface of earth, g d  g 1  
 R

g d

g R
The value of ‘g’ is maximum at the poles and minimum at the equator ‘g’ also varies due to latitude.

g   g p  R2 cos 2 

At the equator   0 ge  gp  R2  gp  ge  R2  0.034m / s2

69
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Weightlessness due to rotation of earth

Apparent weight of a body decreases due to rotation of earth. It becomes weightless at equator when
g
g  R2  0  R  6400 km
R
2
   1.25 103 rad / sec T  1.4 hours
T

F
Gravitational field: Force experienced by unit mass I 
m
Uniform solid sphere

GM
Outside the surface  r  R  I 
r2

GM
On the surface  r  R  I 
R2
GMr
Inside the sphere  r  R  I 
R3
Intensity due to spherical shell
GM
Outside the surface  r  R  I 
r2

GM
On the surface  r  R  I 
R2

Inside the shell (r < R) I = 0

Gravitational Potential
Gravitational potential at a point V is defined as negative of work done per unit mass in shifting from
the given point to infinity.
 
V
W

 F.dr  
   I .dr
m m
dv
I
dr
70
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Potential due to a uniform solid sphere

GM
Outside the surface  r  R  
r

GM
On the surface  r  R  
R

GM   r  
2
GM
Inside the sphere  r  R   3       3 3R 2  r 2 
2R   R   2R

3 GM 3
At the centre of the sphere =   Vsurface
2 R 2
Potential due to a spherical shell

GM
Outside the surface  r  R  
r

GM
On the surface  r  R  
R
GM
Inside the sphere = 
R
Gravitational potential energy
GMm
P.E. of a mass m at a distance r from centres of earth U = 
r
GMm
On the surface =   mgR
R
n
When a mass m is taken from the surface of earth to a height h = nR. The increase in P.E = mgR
n 1
3g
Average density of earth    5500 kg / m3
4RG
71
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Satellites
The necessary centripetal force is provided by gravitational force of attraction

mv 2 GMm GM GM 1
 v  v
r r2 r Rh r
v does not depend on mass of satellite.

r3
Period of satellite T  2 Thus T  r3/2
GM
Energy of satellite

GMm
P.E = 
r

GMm
K.E =
2r
GMm
T.E = 
2r
GMm
Binding energy of satellite = 
2r
First cosmic velocity
GM
If the height of the satellite is very small for a closest orbit v0   Rg  7.9 km / s (1st cosmic
velocity) R
Escape Velocity

2GM
The escape velocity of a body at the surface of earth Ve   2Rg  11.2 km / sec
R
It is also called 2nd cosmic velocity

If a body is projected with velocity greater than escape velocity  v  v e  then by conservation energy..

1 GMm 1 GM
mv 2   mv2  0 ; v 2   v2 ; v  v 2  ve 2
2 R 2 R

The body will move in interstellar space with velocity v 2  ve 2 .

Kepler’s laws of Planetary motion
(1) The law of orbits: Every planet moves around sun in an elliptical orbit with sun at one of the focii.
(2) Law of area: The line joining the sun to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal interval of time
ie, areal velocity is constant.
dA L
 where L - Angular momentum
dt 2m
(3) Law of periods: The square of period of revolution of any planet around sun is directly proportional
to the cube of semi-major axis of the orbit. T 2  a 3

72
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I
1. Two spheres of masses m and M are situated in air and the gravitational force between them is F. The
space around the masses is now filled with a liquid of specific gravity 3. The gravitational force will
now be

F F
1) 3F 2) F 3) 4)
3 9

2 A mass M is split into two parts, m and (M–m), which are then separated by a certain
distance. What ratio of m/M maximizes the gravitational force between the two parts
1) 1/3 2) ½ 3) 1/4 4) 1/5

3. A mass m is at a distance ‘a’ from one end of a uniform rod of length '  ' and mass M. The gravitational
force on the mass due to the rod is

GMm GMm GMm GMm

1) a   2) a   a 3) 4) 2 a   2
     
2
a2

R
4. A point mass m is placed inside a spherical shell of radius R and mass M at a distances   from
2
the centre of the shell. The gravitational force exerted by the shell on the point mass is

GMm 2GMm 4GMm

1) 2) 3) zero 4)
R2 R2 R2
5. The weight of a body at the surface of earth is 18N. The weight of the body at an altitude of 3200 km
above the earth’s surface is (given, radius of earth Re=6400 km)
1) 9.8 N 2) 4.9 N 3) 19.6 N 4) 8 N

6. Acceleration due to gravity on moon is 1 6 of the acceleration due to gravity on earth. If the ratio of

e 5
densities of earth  e  and moon  m  is 
m 3 then radius of moon  m  in terms of  e  will be
R R

5 1 7 1
1) Re 2) Re 3) Re 4) Re
18 6 18 2 3

73
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7. At what depth from the surface of earth the time period of a simple pendulum 0.5% more than that on
the surface of the earth ? (Radius of earth is 6400 km)
1) 32 km 2) 64 km 3) 96 km 4) 128 km

1
8. The depth d, at which the value of acceleration due to gravity becomes   times the value at the
n
surface is [R = 6400 km  Radius of earth]

R  n  1 R  n  1
1) 2) R  3) 4) R 
n  n  n2  n 
9. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface, the gain in potential energy of the body at
a height equal to two times the radius R of the earth will be:

1 2
1) 2 mgR 2) 3 mgR 3) mgR 4) mgR
3 3
10. Acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ and density of the earth '  ' are related by which of the following relations?

[where G  gravitational constant, R  radius of earth]

4GR 3g 3G 4gR
1)   2)   3)   4)  
3g 4GR 4gR 3G
11. An object is allowed to fall from a height R above the earth, where R is the radius of earth. Its velocity
when it strikes the earth’s surface, ignoring air resistance, will be:

gR
1) 2 gR 2) gR 3) 4) 2gR
2

12. Infinite number of bodies, each of mass 2 kg, are situated on x-axis at distance 1m, 2m, 4m, 8m
......... respectively, from the origin. The resulting gravitational potential due to this system at the origin
will be:

4 8
1) –G 2) G 3) G 4) –4G
3 3
13. A body of mass m is lifted up from the surface of earth to a height three times the radius of earth. The
change in potential energy of the body is

3mgR mgR 2mgR

1) mgR 2) 3) 4)
4 3 3

14. A satellite of mass m is revolving in a circular orbit of radius 2R, around the earth of mass M. The
work done to shift the satellite to an orbit of radius 3R is

GMm GMm GMm GMm

1) 2) 3) 4)
2R 3R 9R 12R

74
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

15. There are two planets. The ratio of radius of the two planets is K but ratio of
acceleration due to gravity of both planets is g. What will be the ratio of their
escape velocity
1) (Kg)1 / 2 2) (Kg)1 / 2 3) (Kg)2 4) (Kg)2

16. Escape velocity from the surface of the earth is V. An object is dropped from infinity to earth, which
passes through a smooth tunnel from the surface of the earth to the centre. Velocity when it reaches
the centre is:

3 4
1) V 2) V 3) 3V 4) 2V
2 3

17. If the distance of the earth from Sun is 1.5×106 km. Then the distance of an imaginary planet from
Sun, if its period of revolution is 2.83 years is

1) 6×107 km 2) 6×106 km 3) 3×106 km 4) 3×107 km

18. A satellite is moving around the earth with speed ‘v’ in a circular orbit of radius ‘r’.
If the orbit radius is decreased by 1%, its speed will
1) Increase by 1% 2) Increase by 0.5%
3) Decrease by 1% 4) Decrease by 0.5%

19. The figure shows the motion of a planet around the sun in an elliptical orbit with sun
at the focus. The shaded areas A and B are also shown in the figure which can be
assumed to be equal. If t1 and t2 represent the time for the planet to move from ‘a’
to ‘b’ and ‘d’ to ‘c’ respectively, then

1) t1  t2 2) t1  t2 3) t1  t2 4) t1  t2

20. According to Kepler, the period of revolution of a planet (T) and its mean distance from
the sun (r) are related by the equation

1) T 3r3  constant 2) T 2r 3  constant

3) Tr3  constant 4) T 2r  constant

75
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from the surface of the earth is
11.2 km/s. If the body is projected in a direction making an angle of 45o with the vertical, the escape
velocity will be (in km/s)

22. A geostationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height of 6R above the surface of earth, R being
radius of earth, its time period is T. The time period of another satellite at a height of 2.5R from the
T
surface of earth is n 2 where n is

23. The escape velocity from earth is about 11 km per second. The escape velocity from a planet having
twice the radius and same mean density as earth is in km/s

24. An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the earth with a speed equal to half the
magnitude of the escape velocity from the earth. If the satellite is stopped suddenly in its orbit and
allowed to fall freely on the earth, Find the speed (in km/s) with it hits the surface of earth
( g  m / sec 2 and R  6400 km )


25. The gravitational field in a region is given by E g  5i  12 jN / Kg , then the magnitude of the gravitational
force acting on a particle of mass 2 Kg. placed at the origin, (in N) will be

76
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 08
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS & FLUIDS

SYNOPSIS

A. ELASTICITY
Elasticity is the property of the materials to regain the original state on the removal of the deforming
forces. (Quartz is almost perfectly elastic)
Hooke’s law
stress
With in the limits of elasticity, stress is  strain. Then, E is called Modulus of elasticity
strain

Stress = F/A, Unit = N/m2, Unit of E is also N/m2 Since strain

Strain 
FG change in dimensionIJ
has no unit
H original dimension K
When a wire (or body) is stretched by a force F, a restoring force equal to F but opposite in direction
is developed in the wire. This restoring force/unit area is called tensile stress (=F/A, where A is the
area of cross section of the wire)
FG  IJ
The corresponding strain H K produced is called longitudinal strain or linear strain

tensile stress F/A F 

Then, longitudinal strain   /   Y is called the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire.  Y 
A 
The normal stress acting on a body of volume V producing volume change V is usually taken as the
pressure P and the modulus involved is called Bulk modulus
normal stress (or Pr) F/A F V
Then, Bulk modulus B   ie. B 
volume strain V / V A V
If two equal an opposite forces are applied parallel to the cross sectional area of a body, there
is relative displacement between the opposite faces of the body. The restoring force then, developed
per unit area of the surface is called tangential stress or shearing stress.

The shearing stress can change only the shape of the body. The strain, thus produced is called the
shearing strain and is the ratio of relative displacement r to the distance between the faces r
r
ie; .
r
The ratio of shearing stress to the corresponding shearing strain is called shear modulus or modulus
of rigidity and is represented by G or n.
Then shear modulus G  shearing stress  F / A ie. G =
F r
shearing strain r / r A Δr

77
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

F 
Thus Young’s modulus Y 
A 
F V
Bulk modulus B
A V
F r
Shear modulus G
A r
F V V
Gases and liquids have volume elasticity only. Then B  P E
A V V

V
E is called modulus of elasticity of the liquid or the gas. Also E  P
V
–ve sign indicates than as P increases V decreases.
1 V
Compressibility e in the reciprocal of Bulk modulus B ie; C  1  . It is the fractional change in
B P V
volume per unit increase in pressure.
1
unit of C is ie; N–1m2
Nm2
Gases have isothermal elasticity EI = P, and adiabatic elasticity EA = P
Stretching a wire under increasing weights

 e - limiting stress B is elastic limit or yield point; u - tensile strength or ultimate strength ; along OA
- Hooke’s law is obeyed
Poissons’ ratio
When a wire is extended its diameter decreases. Then the Poissons’ ratio
lateral strain r l
 
longitudinal strain r l
1 1
Theoretical limits - 1 to . Practical limits 0 to
2 2
Work done in stretching

1 1 1
W= load  extension = Fx ; This is the PE stored in the stretched wire. ie; W  Fx = PE
2 2 2

stored

1 1 stress2 Y
Word done /unit volume = Energy stored per unit volume = stress  strain =  strain 2
2 2 Y 2

B. HYDROSTATICS
Density = Mass/Volume

78
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Density of the substance

Relative Density 
Density of water (at 4 0 C)
Thrust = Normal force acting on a surface is Thrust. Unit ----> N

Thrust
Pressure  . Unit - N/m2, or Pascal (Pa). Dimensions - ML-1T-2
area
Pressure due to a fluid column of height h

P = hg Unit Nm–2 or Pa

Atmospheric Pressure P0 is the pressure exerted by the earth’s atmosphere. P0 = Hg where H is the
height of the atmosphere.  is the average density of air
At sea level P0 = 76 cm of Hg
ie, P0  0.76  13.6  10 3  9.8  1.01325  10 5 Pa This is the standard atmospheric pressure.
P0  105 Pa is called one atmosphere or one Bar..
Gauge Pressure : The pressure measured in excess of atmospheric pressure is the gauge pressure. If P
is the actual pressure of a gas in a vessel and h is the manometer level difference P = Po + hg . Here
P – Po = hg is called gauge Pressure.
Pascal’s Law:- (1) Pr. applied at any point in a liquid is equally transmitted to all other points in the liquid
in all direction.
(2) In a communicating column of liquid, pressure is same at all points in a horizontal plane.
Buoyancy:- A body immersed fully or partially in a fluid experiences an upthrust called buoyancy. It is
acting through the C.G of the displaced fluid - the centre of Buoyancy (C.B). For a floating body, wt.
of the floating body = wt. of the liquid displaced by it. For the equilibrium of the floating body, centre
of mass and centre of buoyancy must be along the same vertical line. For stable equilibrium CG lies
below CB and for unstable equilibrium CG lies above CB.
Archimedis principle: When a body is fully immersed in a liquid, the body experiences a loss of wt. Then,
Apparent wt = wt in air – upthrust
Loss of wt = wt of displaced liquid = upthrust
Wt. in air
R.D of a body =
Loss of wt. in water
loss of wt. of a body in liquid
R.D of a liquid =
loss of wt. of the body in water
C. SURFACE TENSION
It is the property of a liquid surface to acquire minimum surface area. It is acting tangential to the
F
surface and is perpendicular to any line imagined to be drawn on the surface. Surface tension T  .
l
Unit N/m. Dimension MT-2
Molecules on the surface of a liquid have greater P.E. Work has to be done in increasing the surface
area. This work done will be stored in the surface in the form of P.E. Surface tension is numerically
equal to work done to increase surface area by unity.

79
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

work w
S.T =  , Energy = Area × S.T
area A
Cohesive force is the force between molecules of same substances.
Adhesive force is the force between molecules of diff.substances.
Angle of contact  is the angle between the tangent to the liquid meniscus and the solid surface in
liquid.
i) If  < 90, the liquid surface will be concave. Adhesive force > Cohesive force. Eg. water in glass
ii) If  > 90 the liquid surface will be convex, adhesive force < cohesive force; eg. Hg in glass
cohesive force
iii) If  = 90, the liquid surface will be horizontal adhesive force = .
2
eg:- water in silver capillary
Applications :-
1. Capillary rise:-

2T cos 2T 1
h ; r is the radius of the capillary tube. If  = 0 h  h  for a given liquid. graph
rdg rg r
between h and r is a rectangular hyperbola. ST in general decreases with increase of temp. ST = 0,
at boiling point and also at critical temp. ST increases with temp for molten cadmium and copper.
2. Excess of Pressure:-
Pressure on the concave side of a surface is greater than that on the convex side. This pressure
difference is called excess of pressure. The excess pressure inside a spherical bubble of radius r is
given by.
4T 2T
P . A drop has only one surface, Therefore, the excess of presure inside a spherical drop P 
r r
T
For a cylindrical drop, the excess of pressure P 
r
Radius of curvature of the interface of two bubbles of radii r1 and r2 (r1 < r2)
r1 r2
r
r2  r1
In case of a thin liquid layer between two glass plates, the excess pressure over the concave surface.
2T 2T
P ; d is the separation between the plates. So force required to separate the plates F  A.
d d
Detergents decreases S.T.
Notes:
(1) In case of capillarity, the excess pressure is balanced by the hydrostatic pressure

2T
ie,  hg
R

Where R is the radius of curvature of the surface.

r
But R  where  is the angle of contact. r is the radius of capillary tube.
cos

80
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2T cos  2Tcos
  hg or, h=
r rg

When  = 0 R= r
2T 2T
  hg h
r rg

(2) In the case of capillaries of insufficient length ( l < h), there will be no overflow. At the upper end
radius of the meniscus increases such that hR = l r1 where, r1 is the radius of curvature of the surface
at the top.
D. VISCOSITY
Viscosity is the internal friction between successive layers of a fluid when it is in stream line motion or
it is the property of fluid to oppose the relative motion between successive layers. The force developed
is called Viscous force or Viscous drag, and is given by,

dv F
F  A ,   ;
dx dv
A
dx
dv
 F when A  1 , 1
dx
 is called the coefficient of viscosity. Its unit is poiseuille (Pl) in SI and poise in CGS system.
1 Pl = 1 N/m2/ unit velocity gradient = Nm-2s or, kg m-1 s-1
Dimensions ML-1T-1
1 Poise = 1 dyne / cm2 / unit velocity gradient
1 Pl = 10 poise (1 deca poise)
Stoke’s formula:-
When a spherical body of radius r and density d is moving down through a liquid of density  , itss
weight is acting in the downward direction. At the same time, the force due to buoyancy and the force
due to viscosity are acting in the upward direction. When the down ward and upward forces become
equal, the body attains a constant velocity called the terminal velocity v. At this condition,
wt. of the body = upthrust + viscos force

The viscos force is given by Stoke’s formula as F  6r

4 3
 Vdg  Vg  6r Here V  r the volume of the body..
3

2 r2
Substituting and simplyfing, the terminal velocity v = d -  g
9 

E. HYDRODYNAMICS
When a liquid is flowing through a pipe of varying area of cross section, the mass of liquid crossing
each section, must be a constant inorder to maintain continous flow
81
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

ie; a1v1  1 = a2v2  2 Since the liquids are incompressible,  1 =  2; a1v1 = a2v2
Bernoulli’s Theorem:-
Total energy of a small amount of liquid flowing from one point to another along a stream line is a
constant. ie, Potential energy + Pressure energy + Kinetic energy = a constant.
P 1 2 P v2 P
For unit mass, gh    2 v  a cons tan t or h   a cons tan t h is gravitational head, g
g 2g

v2
is the pressure head and is the velocity head.
2g
P v2 P v2
For horizontal flow h is constant,   a cons tan t or   a cons tan t .
g 2g  2
As velocity increases pressure decreases.
Applications:-
1. Venturimeter:-

2( P1  P2 ) 2gh
P1 - P2 = h  g; Rate of flow of water = Avv1 = av2 = Aa (A 2  a 2 )  Aa A 2  a 2
Atomiser - Principle: As velocity increases pressure decreases
Velocity of Efflux is the velocity with which a liquid comes out of an orifice. This velocity is equal to
velocity acquired by a body falling freely from a height equal to the height of liquid above the orifice
v  2 gh

Range R = 2 h ( H  h ) ; R is max. when h = H/2.

82
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. In the figure, three identical springs are shown. From spring A, a mass of 4 kg is hung and spring
shows elongation of 1 cm. But when a weight of 6 kg is hung on B & C as shown in figure, the hook
descends through

1) 1 cm 2) 2 cm 3) 3 cm 4) 4 cm

2. A thick rope of rubber of density 1.5  103 kgm 3 and Young’s modulus 5  106 Nm 2 , 8 m in length is
hung from the ceiling of a room, the increase in its length due to its own weight is

1) 9.6  10 2 m 2) 19.2 10 2 m 3) 9.6  10 3 m 4) 9.6 m

3. A steel ring of radius r and cross-sectional area A is fitted on a wooden disc of radius R (R >r). If
Young’s modulus be E, then the force with which the steel ring is expanded is

R R - r E R-r  Er
1) AE 2) AE 3)   4)
r r A A  AR

4. A light spring extends 40 mm when stretched by a force of 10N and for tension upto this value, the
extension is proportional to the stretching force. Two such springs are joined end-to-end and the
double length spring is stretched 40 mm beyond its natural length. The total strain energy (in joule)
stored in the double spring is

1) 0.05 2) 0.10 3) 0.80 4) 0.40

83
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. Figure shows a 80 cm square brass plate of thickness 0.5 cm. It is fixed at its bottom edge. What
tangential force F must be exerted on the upper edge, so that the displacement x of this edge in the
direction of force is 0.16 mm?

(The shear modulus of brass is 3.5  1010 Pa )

1) 2.8  10 4 N 2) 3.8  10 4 N 3) 5  105 N 4) 4 10 5 N

6. A man grows into a giant such that his linear dimensions increase by a factor of 9. Assuming that his
density remians the same, the stress in the leg will change by a factor of

1 1
1) 2) 81 3) 4) 9
9 81
7. The massless wires A and B shown in figure are made of the same material and have radii rA and rB,
respectively. A block of mass m is connected betwen them. When the force F is mg/3, one of the
wires breaks, then which of the following option is correct?

1) A wont break before B if rA > rB

2) A wont break before B if rA = rB
3) Either A or B will break if rA = 2 rB
4) The length of A and B must be known to decide which wire will break

84
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

8. A uniform rectangular bar of area of cross- section A is fixed at one end and on other end force F is
applied as shown in figure. Find the shear stress at a plane through the bar making an angle  with
the vertical as shown in figure.

F F F F
1)  cos 2  2) 3)  sin 2  4) cos 
2A 2A 2A 2A

9. A force F is required to break a wire of length l and radius r. What foce is required to break a wire, of
the same material, having twice the length and six times the radius?

1) F 2) 3F 3) 9F 4) 36 F

10. A U-tube contains water and methylated spirit separated by mercury. The mercury columns in the
two arms are in level with 10.0 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of sprit in the other. The specific
gravity of spirit would be

1) 0.70 2) 0.80 3) 0.90 4) 0.60

11. By inserting a capillary tube upto a depth l in water, the water rises to a height h. If the lower end of the
capillary tube is closed inside water and the capillary is taken out and closed and opened, to what
height the water will remain in the tube, when l > h ? (angle of contact = 0)

1) zero 2) l + h 3) 2h 4) h

12. A cylindrical vessel is filled with equal amounts of weight of mercury and water. The overall height of
the two layers is 29.2 cm, specific gravity of mercury is 13.6. Then the pressure of the liquid at the
bottom of the vessel is

1) 29.2 cm of water 2) 29.2 / 13.6 cm of mercury

3) 4 cm of mercury 4) 15.6 cm of mercury

85
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

13. A body of density  is dropped from rest at a height h into a take of density  , where    . Neglecting
all dissipative forces, calculate the maximum depth to which the body sinks before returning to float
on the surface.
h h h h
1) 2) 3) 4)
   
14. A cubical block of wooden edge l and a density  floats in water of density 2 . The lower surface of
cube just touches the free end of a massless spring of force constant k fixed at the bottom of the
vessel. The weight  put over the block so that it is completely immersed in water without wetting the
weight is

 lρg   k
1)  lρg  k  
2)  l ρg - k
2
 3)  
 2
 2k 

4) l  l ρg 

2

2
15. A ring is cut from a platinum tube 8.5 cm internal diameter and 8.7 cm external diameter. It is supported
hoprizontally from a pan of a balance, so that it comes in contact with the water in glass vessel. If an
extra 3.47 g-wt is required to pull it away from water, surface tension of water is
1) 62.96 dyne cm-1 2) 100.0 dyne cm-1 3) 6.28 dyne cm-1 4) 0.06 dyne cm-1
16. Figure i and Figure ii refer to the steady flow of a (non -viscous) liquid. Which of the figures is/are
incorrect?

1) Figure i 2) Figure ii 3) both i and ii 4) None of these

17. An incompressible liquid flows through a horizontal tube as shown in the figure. Then, the velocity 
of the fluid is

1) 3 m/s 2) 1.5 m/s 3) 1.0 m/s 4) 2.25 m/s

18. What is the ratio of surface energy of 1 small drop and 1 large drop if 1000 drops combine to form 1
large drop?
1) 100 : 1` 2) 1000 : 1 3) 10 : 1 4) 1 : 100

86
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Statement Questions
Read the following questions and give your answer using the following options (a,b, c and d):
a) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement -2 is correct explanation for Statement -1
b) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true, Statement -2 is not correct explanation for Statement -1
c) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false
d) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true
19. Statement -1 : When height of a tube is less than liquid rise in the capillary tube,the liquid does not
overflow
Statement -2 : Product of radius of meniscus and height of liquid in capillary tube always remains
constant.
20. Statement -1 : The velocity of fall of a man jumping with a parachute first increases and then becomes
constant.
Statement -2 : The constant velocity of fall of man is called terminal velocity.
SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. Consider a water tank as shown in the figure. Its cross-sectional area is 0.4 m2. The tank has an
opening B near the bottom whose cross- sectional area is 1 cm2. A load of 24 kg is applied on the
water at the top when the height of the water level is 40 cm above the bottom, the velocity of water
coming out the opening B is  ms -1 . The value of  , to the nearest integer, is.........
(Take, g = 10 ms-2)

22. The largest average velocity (in ms-1) os blood flow in artery of radius 2 103 , if the flow must remain
laminar will be .........................(Take, viscosity of blood  2.084 10 3 Pa  s and density of blood
 1.04 103 kgm 3 ). (Take critical Reynold’s number as 2000)
23. If a solid floats with (1/4)th its volume above the surface of water, then the density (in kgm-3) of the
solid will be ....................
24. When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of
15 cm within it. If the contact angle between the liquid and glass is close to 00, the surface tension of
3 2
the liquid (in mN m-1) to the nearest integer is (Take ,  liquid   900 kgm , g  10 ms )
25. A square plate of side 10 cm moves parallel to another plate with a velocity of 10 cms-1. The gap
between the plates is filled with water. If the viscous force is 200 dyne and viscosity of water is 0.01
poise, then their separation distance is found to be x  10 2 cm , then the value of x is .................

87
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 9
HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

SYNOPSIS
Temperature : Temperature of a body is that physical quantity which indicates degree of hotness or coldness
of the body.
Heat : Heat is a form of energy. The natural flow of heat is from higher temperature to lower temperature.
Different types of temperature scales
No. of divisions on
Name of scale Symbol Lower fixed point Upper fixed point
the scale
0
Celsius C 00 C 1000C 100

0
Fahrenheit F 320F 2120F 180

Kelvin K 273 K 373K 100

C F  32 K  273
Relationship between different scales  
100 180 100
At the following temperature different temperature scales have the same reading
– 400C = –400F
574.250F = 574.25K
Celsius scale and Kelvin scale cannot have the same reading.
The Celsius and Kelvin scale have different zero points but the same size degrees.
Therefore any temperature difference is the same on the Celsius and Kelvin scales.
If f reading correspond to faulty thermometer and the true value then
t  LFP of truescale f  LFP of faultyscale

(UFP  LFP) of truescale (UFP  LFP)of faultyscale
Thermometry
A branch of science which deals with the measurement of temperature. The linear variation in some
physical properties of a substance with change in temperature is the basic principle of thermometry and
this properties are defined as thermometric property which are:
1. Volume of liquid - liquid thermometers
2. Pressure of a gas - constant volume gas thermometers
3. Electrical resistance - resistance thermometers
4. Thermoemf - thermoelectric thermometer
5. Intensity of light - radiation pyrometer

88
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

6. Magnetic property - magnetic thermometer

 X t  X0 
If X is the thermometric property then the unknown temperature t   X  X  x 1000C
 100 0 

Thermal expansion in solids

The length, area and volume of a solid increases with increase in temperature as
L t  L 0 (1  t)   coefficient of linear expansion
A t  A 0 (1   t)   coefficient of superficial expansion

Vt  V0 (1  t)   coefficient of cubical expansion

 :  :   1: 2 : 3

For anisotropic solids    X   Y   Z where  X,  Y and  Z represent coefficient of linear expansion

along three mutually perpendicular directions.
For small change in temperature

L  L   T, A  A  T,  V  V T
Contraction on Heating
Some rubber like substances contract with rise in temperature because transverse vibration of atoms
dominate over longitudinal vibrations which is responsible.
Effect of temperature on time period of pendulum

T 1
  t
T 2

1
If T = 1 sec Time loss/gain per day =  t  86400sec.
2
Thermal Stress in Rigid Fixed Rod
Thermal stress = Y-   t.
Thermal Expansion of Liquid
Since liquid can be heated only by heating the container along with the liquid the container also expands
therefore apparent expansion of the liquid is not the real expansion. Thus a liquid has got 2 expansivities.

Real increase in volume (V) r

r  
Initial Volume  changein temp. V 

Apparent increase in volume (V)a

a  
Initial Volume   V 

 r   app   vessel

Anomalous Expansion of Water

In the case of water it expands on heating if its temperature is greaten than 4oC. In the range 0oC to 4oC
water contracts on heating and expands on cooling. This behaviour of water in the range of 0oC to 4oC
is called anomalous expansion of water. Density of water is maximum a 4oC and volume minimum.

89
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Variation of Density with Temperature

In the case of a substance it expands on heating therefore density decreases.

0
  0 (1   )
1  
Expansion of Gases
At constant pressure Vt = V0 (1 +  t),
 Coefficient of volume expansion
At constant volume Pt = P0 (1 +  t),

 -Coefficient of pressure expansion

1 o -1
For an ideal gas    C
273
Specific Heat C
It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of a substance through 1oC or 1K
expressed in J/kgoC or J/KgK
Sp: heat capacity of water = 4200/JKgK or 4.2J/gmK = 1cal/gmoC
Thermal capacity H
Amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a body by 1oC
H = mc J/oC
Water equivalent
The mass of water which has got the same thermal capacity as that of the substance

mc
Water equivalent = c
w

Dulong and petit law

Average molar sp:heat of all metals at room temperature is constant (except Be, B, C, Si)
Principle of mixtures
When two bodies at different temperature are placed in contact, heat will be transferred from a body at
higher temperature to lower temperature until both reach a common temperature. Then
Heat lost by hot body = heat gained by cold body
Specific Heat of Gases (Molar Specific Heat)
Molar specific heat at constant volume CV : The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1
mole of gas through 1oC or 1K keeping volume constant.
Molar specific heat at constant pressure Cp heat required to raise the temperature of 1 mole of gas
through 1oC or 1K keeping pressure constant.
CP - CV = R (Mayer’s relation)

CP 2
1 = 
CV f
f - degree of freedom

90
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Latent heat
The Amount of heat required to change the state of unit mass of the substance
Latent heat of ice = 80 cal/g
Latent heat of steam = 536 cal/g
Solar constant : The amount of solar energy received in unit time by unit area of earth.
S = 1400 Wm-2
Kinetic theory of gases
Boyle’s law

1
V at constant temperature for a given mass of ideal gas
P

P1V1 = P2V2
Charle’s Law
V T at constant pressure for a given mass of ideal gas

For an ideal gas

P  T at constant volume
Avagadro’s hypothesis
Equal volume of all gases under the same pressure and temperature contain equal no. of molecules.
Ideal gas equation
PV = nRT
R = 8.31 J mol-1 k-1 = 1.98 cal mol-1 0C-1 = 2 cal mol-1 0C-1
R
k N  Avagadro number
N
R  universal gas constant
k  Boltzman’s constant
Kinetic theory of gases

C12  C 22  .......C n2
Root mean square velocity Crms 
n
91
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

3RT
Crms 
M

C1  C2  ........  Cn 8RT
Average speed = Cav  ; C av 
n M

2RT
Most probable speed Cmp 
M

1 T
Mean free path   ;
2d n
2
P
d  diameter of molecule
n  no. of molecules per unit volume
Pressure exerted by a gas
1
P  C 2rms
3
KE of a gas : - KE is equally divided between degree of freedoms (Equipartition theorem)
1
KE of a molecule / degree of freedom = kT
2
1
KE of one mole / degree of freedom = RT
2
n
Total kinetic energy for one molecule = kT
2
n
Total kinetic energy for one mole = RT
2
where ‘n’ is the no. of degrees of freedom.
THERMODYNAMICS
Thermodynamics deals with processes involving heat, work and internal energy.
System: It is a portion of matter under consideration.
Surroundings: Anything outside the system which has got some bearing on the behaviour of the system.
1. Open system  can exchange matter and energy with surroundings
2. Closed system  can exchange only energy
3. Isolated system  cannot exchange matter and energy..
First law of thermodynamics
Q  U  W
Q  heat absorbed or released
U  change in internal energy
W  work done
 work done by the system is taken as positive
 work done on the system is taken as negative
92
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

 heat absorbed is taken as positive

 heat released is taken as negative
Work done by a thermodynamic system
V2

W   PdV
V1

Thermodynamic Processes
Thermodynamic equilibrium  If the system is in mechanical equilibrium, thermal equilibrium and
chemical equilibrium it is said to be in thermodynamic equilibrium.
Quasistatic Process  A process in which all the states through which the system passes can be
considered as thermodynamic equilibrium is known as a quasistatic process.
Isobaric Process - Constant Pressure

Isochoric Process - Constant Volume

Work Done = 0

Isothermal Process - Constant Temperature

U  0
Q  W
PV = constant

W  2.303nRTlog  V2 / V1   2.303nRTlog  P1 / P2 

Isothermal bulkmodulus of elasticity = P

Adiabatic Process  No heat exchange between system and surroundings.
Q  0 , U   W

equation of state

PV   constant
nR
TV 1  constant Work done W=  T1  T2 
 -1
T  P1  constant
 The slope of adiabatic is  times that of isothermal.
 Adiabatic bulkmodulus of elasticity = P

93
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Cyclic Process

U  0; Q=W

Work done in cyclic process is the area of cyclic loop.

Critical temperature: Temperature below which alone the gas can be liquified by the mere application of
pressure.
Critical Pressure: The minimum pressure that should be applied to the gas at its critical temperature in
order to liquify it.
Critical Volume: Volume at critical temperature and pressure.
Triple point  It is a point on the P - T plane at which the solid, liquid and vapour states of a substance co
exist in dynamic equilibrium.
Second law of thermodynamics
Kelvin statement: It is impossible to get a continuous supply of work from a body by cooling it to a
temperature lower than its surroundings.
Clausius statement: It is impossible for a self acting machine to transfer heat from a body at a lower
temperature to a body at a higher temperature.
Carnot’s heat engine

W  Q1  Q2

W Q
 1 2
Q1 Q1

T2
 1
T1

Carnot’s cycle:

1. Isothermal expansion
2. Adiabatic expansion
3. Isothermal compression
4. Adiabatic compression

Refrigerator
Q2 T2
Coefficient of performance = W  T  T
1 2

94
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Heat Transfer
There are three modes of heat transfer
1. Conduction 2. Convection 3. Radiation
Conduction
In conduction heat flows from a region of high temperature to a region of low temperature with out the
transport of matter. Heat imparted to any part of a body sets the molecules of that part into more
energetic vibrations. These molecules transmit the vibrations to their neighbours and heat travels along
the body from molecules to molecules.
Convection :
Heat flows along with the transport of matter. It is possible only in fluids. Trade winds, Land breeze and
sea breeze and monsoon are due to convection.
Radiation :
In radiation heat does not require any material medium. It travels in the form of electromagnetic radia-
tion
Law of heat conduction

Q  T 
 kA  
t  x 
A  cross sectional area of the slab
x  thickness of slab
T  difference in temperature between ends
Q
 rate of heat flow
t
k  thermal conductivity

T
 temperature gradient
x

KA l
Thermal conductance = ; Thermal resistance =
l KA
If two conductors are connected in series equivalent thermal resistance R = R1 + R2
1 1 1
Connected in parallel R  R  R
1 2

Properties of heat radiations

 Radiant heat travels with the speed of light
 It travels along a straight line
 It can be reflected as well as refracted like light rays
 Intensity of heat radiations decreases in inverse square proportionality with distance
 It shows the phenomenon of interference, diffraction and polarisation
Perfectly black body : A body which absorbs all radiation incident on it.

95
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Absorptive power (a) : The ratio of radiant energy absorbed to the total energy incident on it.
a 1
a = 1 for perfectly black body
Emissive power : Energy emitted per unit area per unit time by a body
Kirchoff’s law :

emissive power
 cons tan t  a good emitter is a good absorber
absorptive power
Stefan’s law
Radiant energy emitted by a black body per unit area per second is proportional to fourth power of
absolute temperature T.
E  T 4 ; E  T 4

  5.68  108 Wm 2 K 4
Stefan - Boltzman law

Net radiant energy lost from a black body per unit area per unit time, E   T 4  T0 4  , T0  temp of
surroundings
Wien’s displacement law
The wavelength of maximum spectral intensity is inversely proportional to the absolute temperature of
the body

1
m ;  m T  b Wien 's cons tan t
T
b = 0.29 cm K
Newton’s law of cooling
When the temperature difference between the body and its surroundings is not very large, then the rate
of cooling is directly proportional to the temperature difference.
1  2  1  2 
   0
t  2 
1  initial temperature of the body

2  final temperature of the body

t  time taken to cool from 1 to 2

0  temperature of surroundings

96
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I
1. An iron piece is heated from 300C
to 900C.
Find the change in its temperature on the Fahrenheit and
the kevlin scale.
1) 108 and 60 2) 60 and 108 3) 100 and 50 4) 50 and 40
2. On an X temperature scale, water freezes at -125.0 X and boils at 375.00 X. On a Y temperature
0

scale, water freezes at -70.00Y and boils ate -30.00Y. The value of temperature on X-scale equal to the
temperature of 50.00Y on Y-scale is
1) 455.00X 2) -125.00X 3) 1375.00X 4) 1500.00X
3. An isosceles triangle is formed with a rod of length l1 and coefficient of linear expansion 1 for the base
and two thin rods each of length  2 and coefficient of linear expansion  2 for the two pieces, if the
distance between the apex and the midpoint of the base remain unchanged as the temperature is
1
varied, then 
2

2 2 1 1
1) 2 2) 2 3) 4) 4
1 1 2 2
4. A glass flask of volume 1 litre at 00C is filled, level full of mercury at this temperature. The flask and
mercury are now heated to 1000C. How much mercury will spill out, if coefficient of volume expansion
of mercury is 1.82 10 4 / 0C and linear expansion of glass is 0.1 104 / 0C respectively?
1) 21.2 cc 2) 15.2 cc 3) 1.52 cc 4) 2.12 cc
5. Two liquids are at temperature 20 C and 40 C when same mass of both of them is mixed, the
0 0

temperature of the mixture is 320C. What is the ratio of their specific heat:
1 2 1 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 5 5
6. The graph shown in the figure represent change in the temperature of 5kg of a substance as it absorbs
heat at a constant rate of 63 kJ min-1. The latent heat of vaporization of the substance is:

1) 630 kJ kg-1 2) 126 kJ kg-1 3) 84 kJ kg-1 4) 12.6 kJ kg-1

97
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

7. 10 kg of ice at -100C is mixed with 40 kg of water at 450C. The final temperature of mixture is:
(specific heat of ice = 2100 J/kg -k)
1) 190C 2) 170C 3) 150C 4) 130C
8. 5g of ice at 00C is kept in a calorimeter of water equivalent 5g. How much heat should be supplied to
the apparatus to evaporate the water thus formed? (Neglect loss of heat)
1) 4100 cal 2) 7200 cal 3) 13600 cal 4) 8200 cal
9. Three rods of same material and of equal cross sectional area and length have been connected together
as shown in the figure.

The temperature of the junction of the rods approximately is

1) 350C 2) 470C 3) 510C 4) 570C
10. The figure shows a system of two cocentric spheres of radii r1 and r2 and kept at temperature T1 and
T2 respectively. The radial rate of flow of heat in a substance between the two concentric spheres is
proportional to:

 r2  r1r2
1)  r2  r1  / r1r2 2) In   3) r  r 4)  r2  r1 
 r1   2 1
11. One end of a thermally insulated rod is kept at a temperature T1 and the other at T2. The rod is composed
of two sections of lengths l1 and l2 and thermal conductivities k1 and k2 respectively. The temperature
at the interface of the two sections is

1) (k2l2T1 + k1l1 T2) / (k1l1 + k2l2) 2) (k2l2T1+ k1l1T2)/(k2l1+ k1l2)

3) (k1l2T1 + k2l1T2)/ (k1l2+ k2l1) 4) (k1l1T1 + k2l2T2)/(k1l1+ k2l2)

98
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

12. Hot water cools from 600C to 500C in the first 10 minutes and to 420C in the next 10 minutes. The
temperature of the surroundings is:
1) 250C 2) 100C 3) 150C 4) 200C
13. The power radiated by a black body is P and it radiates maximum energy at wavelength  0 . If the

3
temperature of the blackbody is now changed so that it radiates maximum energy at wavelength 0 ,
4
the power radiated by it becomes nP. The value of n is
256 4 3 81
1) 2) 3) 4)
81 3 4 256
14. When a system is taken from state 1 to 2 along the path 1a2 it absorbes 50 cal of heat and work done
is 20 cal. Along the path 1b2, Q=36 cal. What is the wotk done along 1b2?

1) 56 cal 2) 66 cal 3) 16 cal 4) 6 cal

15. The ratio of work done by an ideal diatomic gas to the heat supplied by the gas in an isobaric process
is
5 3 2 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
7 5 5 3
16. A cyclic process for 1 mole of an ideal gas is shown in figure in the V-T, diagram. The work done in AB,
BC and CA respectively

 V1  V1
1) 0,RT2 ln   , R  T1  T2  2) R  T1  T2  , 0, RT, ln
 V2  V2

 v2   V2 
3) 0, RT2 ln   ,R  T1  T2  4) 0, RT2 ln   ,R  T2  T1 
 v1   V1 
99
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17. For diatomic gas the relation between pressure of a gas and temperature T is given by P  T C . Then
value of C will be: (For adiabatic process)
7 2 5 7
1) 2) 3) 4)
5 7 7 2
 4 1
th

18. The volume of a poly-atomic gas     compressed adiabatically to of the original volume. If the
 3 8
original pressure of the gas is P0 the new pressure will be:-
1) 8P0 2) 16 P0 3) 6P0 4) 2P0
19. V-T curve for 2 moles of a gas is straight line as shown in the graph here. Find the pressure of gas at
A.

1) 125 N/m2 2) 1.25  104 N / m 2 3) 225 N/m2 4) 2.25  104 N / m 2

20. A vessel of volume 8 litre contains an ideal gas at 300K and 2 atm pressure. The gas is allowed to leak
till pressure becomes 125 kpa. Calculate amount of moles which leakout, if temperature remains
constant-
1) 0.4 moles 2) 0.24 moles 3) 0.34 moles 4) 0.14 moles
SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. The spectrum of black body at two temperature 270C and 3270C is shown. If A1 and A2 are the areas
under the two curves respectively and 1 and  2 are wavelengths corresponding to maximum emission

A2
then A1 is equal to

100
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

22. The density of upper atmosphere is very low of the order of 1014m-3. Assuming the average diameter of

35 0
air molecule as A , the approximate mean free path of air molecules in (in km)

23. A vessel contains 28gm of N2 and 32 gm of O2 at temperature T = 1800K and pressure 2atm. Find the
pressure if N2 dissociates 30% and )2 dissociates 50% if temperature remains constant. (in atm)
24. The PV diagram of 2g of helium gas for a certain process A  B is shown. What is the heat given to
the gas during the process A  B is nP0V0, then the value of n is

25. A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle ABCD as shown in figure. Heat rejected by the
gas during the cycle is nPV. Then value of n is

101
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 10
OSCILLATIONS

SYNOPSIS
If a body repeats the same motion after equal time interval that motion is called periodic motion.
If the periodic motion is a to and fro motion along a st. line on either side of the mean position that
periodic motion is called SHM.

All SHM are periodic motion but all periodic motions are not SHM.

Consider a body making SHM along a line PQ on either side of mean position O, with an angular freq.
 .
If R is the position of the body after t sec OR is the displacement made in t sec from the mean position.
The maximum displacement from the mean position to the extreme position is called the amplitude
[A].
ie, OP = A and OQ = A

Length of the line PQ  OP  OQ  2A

The displacement made in t sec from the mean position, along Y axis is given by
Y  A sin t
Along X axis is given by x  A cos t
If there is phase difference  .

y  Asin  t   and x  A cos  t   

Velocity of the body t sec after crossing the mean position is

V  A cos t .
Velocity after a displacement y from the mean position is

V   A2  y2 .

At the mean position , y = 0

V   A , the maximum velocity . ie, Vmax   A .

102
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

At extreme position, y = A
V  0 .
Acceleration of the body after t sec is,

a  2Asin t .
But A sin t  y .
 Acceleration at a displacement y is,

a  2 y .
- ve sign means displacement y is away from the men position but acceleration is towards the
mean position.
At the mean position, y =0
 acceleration a = 0.
At extreme position , y = A.
Acceleration a  2 A , the maximum acceleration.

ie, a max  2 A

 dy   d2 y 
If y  A sin t , is the displacement of a body in SHM at t seconds,   is the velocity and  dt 2 
 dt   
is the acceleration at t seconds

d2 y
 2  2 A sin t  2 y
dt

d2 y
  2 y  0
dt 2
This equation is called the differential equation of SHM
Energy of SHM
1
KE  mv 2 ,
2

at y displacement , v   A 2  y 2

1  2

 at y displacement, KE  m  A2  y2 
2  

1
KE  m2  A 2  y 2 
2
 at mean position, y =0,
1
KE  m2 A 2 .
2

103
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

At extreme position , y = A.

K.E  0 .

1
To displace a body of mass m through a distance y, an amount of work  m2 y 2 , is to be done.
2
This work will be stored as PE at the displaced position
 PE at a displacement y is,

1
PE  m2 y 2 .
2

At mean position , y = 0  PE  0 .

1
At extreme position , y = A  PE  m2A 2 .
2

Total energy at any position is the sum of KE and PE at that position.

1
 TE at any position = KE + PE  mw A , is a constant.
2 2

At m e an position At e x tre m e position At y displa ce m e nt

1) displacement y = 0 displacement y = A, the maximum displacement 0 < y < A

2) v    A, the max v= 0    a2  y2

3) acceleration a = 0  2 A the max a   2 y

1 1
4) K E  m  2 A 2 , the max KE = 0 KE  m 2 a 2  y 2 
2 2
1 1
5) PE = 0 PE  m  2 A 2 , the max PE  m 2 y 2
2 2
1 1 1
6) TE  m 2 A 2 TE  m 2 A 2 TE  m 2 A 2
2 2 2

1
 TE = KE at mean position = PE at extreme position. = m2 A 2
2
Time taken to complete one SHM is called the time period [T] given by

2 2
T or   .
 T
104
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Number SHM completed in one second is called frequency    given by

1 
 or   .
T 2

Displacement energy graph.

When the body moves from extreme left P to extreme right Q, KE increases first from zero to maximum
and then decreases to zero.

But PE first decreases from maximum to zero and then increases to maximum. Increase in KE is
equal to decrease in PE and vice versa. Therefore TE is a constant at every position.

Simple Pendulum

Consider a simple pendulum of length l, with a spherical bob of mass m and radius r, at a place where
acceleration due to gravity is g. Length of the pendulum is the distance from point of suspension to the
centre of gravity (G) of the bob, If the centre of gravity of the sphere (G) and centre of sphere are
same point.

If the bob is slightly displaced to one side and then released it makes SHM on either side of equilibrium


position with a time period. T  2  g

Laws of simple pendulum :-

Ist Law - For small amplitude, T is independent of mass or size or shape of the bob.

2nd Law - For small amplitude T  .

1
3rd Law - For small amplitude, T 
g

In simple pendulum experiment, graph between l and T2 is a straight line passing through the origin.

105
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Oscillations of a spring

Mass M is suspended from the spring O is the equilibrium position of M. When M is pulled downward
by a small force F it displaces y downwards.
If the mass M is displaced, by y downwards, length of the spring also increases by y.  Displacement
of mass M is equal to increase in length of spring.

Fy

Force F
F = K  y , K is the spring constant given by K = =
Displacement y

M
When mass M kg is suspended from spring and put into SHM, time period is given by T  2
K

Parallel combination

Let K1 and K2 be the constants of two springs in parallel carrying mass M. Each spring is hanging from
the support and each spring is carrying mass M.
If the mass M is displaced by y down wards length of each spring increases by y.
Effective constant (K) of the combination is the sum of constants of all springs

 K  K1  K 2 .

M
T  2
K1  K 2

106
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Series Combination

Let K1 and K2 be the constants of two springs in series carrying mass M. Any one of the given springs
is hanging from the support and another spring is carrying mass M.
When M is displaced by y downwards length of each spring increases, but total increase in length of
all springs will be the displacement y of mass M.
Reciprocal of effective constant K is the sum of the reciprocals of constants of all springs.
1 1 1
ie,  
K K1 K 2

K1.K 2
K
K1  K 2

M  K1  K 2 
T  2
K1.K 2
[In parallel combination one end of each spring is connected to the support and other and of each
spring is connected to the mass. In series combination one end of one spring is connected to the
support and one end of another spring is connected to the mass.]
Free oscillation
The oscillation of a particle with fundamental frequency under the influence of restoring force are
defined as free oscillations. The amplitude, frequency and energy of oscillation remains constant.
Frequency of free oscillation is called natural frequency .

Damped oscillations
Differential equation for damped oscillators and its solution. In a real oscillator in a fluid, the damping
force is proportional to the velocity vector  of the oscillator..

107
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Fd   bv
Where b is damping constant which depends on the characteristics of the fluid and the body that
oscillates in it. The negative sign indicates that the damping force opposes the motion.
 Total restoring force F   kx  bv

d2 x dx d2 x dx
or m 2
  kx  b or m 2
 b  kx  0
dt dt dt dt
This is the differential equation for damped S.H.M. The solution of the equation is
x  t   ae  bt / 2m cos  t   
The amplitude of the damped S.H.M. is
a   ae  bt / 2m
Where a is amplitude of undamped S.H.M. Clearly, a  decreases exponentially with time.
The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is

k b2
  
m 4m 2
mechanical energy of the damped oscillator at any instant t will be
1 1
E  t   ka 2  ka 2 e  bt / m
2 2

Note:

   1.
Small damping means that the dimensionless ratio  b 
 km 
Forced oscillation
The oscillation in which a body oscillates under the influence of an external periodic force is known as
forced oscillation
Resonance : When the frequency of external force is equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator, the
body oscillates with maximum amplitude. This state is known as resonance. And this frequency is
known as resonance frequency.
108
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Differential equation of force oscillator

Let F(t) = F0 cos d t is an external force applied to a damped oscillator..

The total force acting on the damped oscillator, F = – bv – kx + F0 cos d t

where –bv is the damping force and –kx is the linear restoring force
F + bv + kx = F0 cos d t

d2x dx
m b  kx  F0 cos d t
dt 2 dt
This is the differential equation of an oscillator of mass m on which a periodic force of (angular) frequency
d is applied. The oscillator initially oscillates with its natural frequency  . When we apply the external
periodic force, the oscillation with the natural frequency die out, and the body oscillates with the (angular)
frequency of the external periodic force.
Motion of forced oscillator
The solution (displacement) of the above differential equation of forced oscillator can be written as
x  t   A cos  d t   

F0
 0
  tan  
1
where A = m 2  2  2 2  2 b 2 and
2

d d d x 0

where m is the mass of the particle. v0 and x0 are the velocity and the displacement of the particle at
time t = 0, (which is the moment when we apply the periodic force).
Amplitude

 = d Frequency

109
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

d2x
1. The equation of a particle of mass 1g is   2 x  0 where x is displacement (in m) from mean
dt 2
position. The frequency of oscillation is (in Hz)

1 1
1) 2) 2 3) 5 10 4)
2 5 10
2. Which of the following equations does not represent a simple harmonic motion
1) y  a sin t 2) y  a cos t 3) y  a sin t  b cos t 4) y  a tan t
3. A particle executes simple harmonic motion with a time period of 16s. At time t = 2s, the particle
crosses the mean position while at t = 4s, its velocity is 4ms–1. The amplitude of motion in metre is

1) 2 2) 16 2  3) 24 2  4) 32 2 / 
4. The x-t graph of a particle undergoing simple harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration of
the particle at t = 4/3 s is

3 2 2 2 3 2
1)  cm / s2 2) cm / s2 3) cm / s2 4)   cm / s 2
32 32 32 32

5. A body performs SHM with an amplitude A. At a distance A / 2 from the mean position, the correct
relation between KE and PE is

PE PE
1) KE  2) KE  2 PE 3) KE = PE 4) KE 
2 2
6. A horizontal spring block of mass M executes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude A when the
block is passing through its equilibrium position an object of mass m is put on it and the two move
together. Find new amplitude of vibration.

M Mm (M  m)2
1) A 2) A 3) 4) A
Mm M M

110
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

7. For a simple harmonic motion, match the column I and column II

Column I Column II

a) Velocity-time graph p) Straight line

b) Acceleration-velocity graph q) Circle

c) Acceleration-displacement graph r) Ellipse

d) Acceleration-time graph s) Sinusoidal curve

1) a-s; b-r; c-p; d-s 2) a-r; b-s; c-p; d-q

3) a-s; b-p; c-r; d-q 4) a-s; b-q; c-p; d-s
8. A spring of spring constant 150 N/m is divided into 5 equal parts, 3 of then are connected in parallel
with a block of mass 5kg. Then time period of oscillation of the system is:

5 2 3 2
1) second 2) second 3) 5 2 second 4) second
2 3 5 5
9. A system is shown in the figure. The time period for small oscillations of the two blocks will be

3m 3m 3m 3m
1) 2  2) 2  3) 2  4) 2 
k 2k 4k 8k
10. In each of the following questions, a statement of Assertion (A) is given followed by a corresponding
statement of Reason (R) just below it. Of the statements mark the correct answer as
Statement - I: The motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic only for a  

and
Statement 2 - Motion of a simple pendulum is SHM for small angular displacement
1) Statement -1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is a correct explanation for Statement - I
2) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement - I
3) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is False
4) Statement - 1 is False, Statement - 2 is True

111
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. The frequency of a simple pendulum is n oscillations per minute while that of another is (n + 1)
oscillations per minute. The ratio of length of first pendulum to the length of second is

2 2 2
n  1  n 1  n 
1) 2)  n   3)   4)  
n 1  n  n   n 1

12. Statement - I: When a girl sitting on a swing stands up, the periodic time of the swing will increase

and

Statement -2: In standing position of a girl, the length of the swing will decrease

1) Statement -1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is a correct explanation for Statement - I

2) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is True; Statement - 2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement
-I

3) Statement - 1 is True, Statement - 2 is False

4) Statement - 1 is False, Statement - 2 is True

13. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum inside a stationary lift and finds it to be T s. If the lift
accelerates upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the period of the pendulum will be

T 2T
1) T 2) 3) 4) 2T 5
4 5

14. The string of a simple pendulum is replaced by a uniform rod of length L and Mass M while the bob
has a mass m. It is allowed to make small oscillations. Its time period is

 2M  L 2  M  3m  L M  m L  2m  M  L
1) 2   2) 2 3) 2 4) 2
 3m  g 3  M  2m  g  M  3m  g 3  M  2m  g

112
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

15. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted at one end. The rod’s other end is supported by a
spring of force constant k. The rod is displaced by a small angle  from its horizontal equilibrium
position and released. The angular frequency of the subsequent simple harmonic motion is

3k k 3k 3g k
1) 2) 3)  4)
m 3m m 2L m
16. A uniform disc of radius 5 cm and mass 200g is fixed at its centre to a metal wire the other end of
which is fixed with a clamp. The hanging disc is rotated about the wire through an angle and is released.
If the disc makes torsional oscillations with time period 0.2s find torsional constant of wire
1) 25 kg m2/s2 2) 2.5 kg m2/s2
3) 0.25 kg m2/s2 4) 250 kg m2/s2

17. A moving particle of mass has one - dimensional potential energy U(x) = ax2 + bx4, where ‘a’ and ‘b’ are
positive constants. The angular frequency of small oscillations about the minima of the potential energy
is equal to

a a 2a a
1)  2) 2 3) 4)
2b m m 2m

18. A particle is performing S.H.M. with acceleration a  8 2  4 2 x where x is coordinate of the particle
w.r.t. the origin. The parameters are in S.I. units. The particle is at rest at x = –2 at t = 0

1) coordinate of the particle w.r.t. origin at any time t is 2  4 cos 2 t

2) coordinate of the particle w.r.t. origin at any time t is –2 + 4 sin 2t

3) coordinate of the particle w.r.t. origin at any time t is –4 + 2 cos 2 t

4) the coordinate cannot be found because mass of the particle is not given

19. The displacement of a simple harmonic motion is given by:

   2 
y  5sin  t    3 sin t   . Then resultant displacement is given by:
 6  3 

5
1) 2 7 m 2) 4 m 3) m 4) 9 m
2

113
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. A pendulum of length ‘  ’ is suspended from the roof of a lift. When the lift is stationary, T is the time
 4T 
period. When the lift moves with an acceleration ‘a’ time period becomes   . What will be the
 5 
value of ‘a’?

9g 9g 3g 3g
1) upwards 2) downwards 3) upwards 4) downwards
16 16 5 5

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. A particle of mass 10 grams is executing simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 1.0 m and
periodic time of   / 5  seconds. The maximum value of the force acting on the particle is

22. A mass m attached to a spring oscillates with a period of 3s. If the mass is increased by 1 kg the
period increases by 1s. Then find 7m.

23. A particle performs S.H.M. with time period T. The time taken by the particle to move from half the
amplitude to the maximum displacement is T/n. Find n

24. A body of mass 36gram makes SHM with a time period 12 second and amplitude 13cm. At t = 0,
displacement is 13cm. Force acting on the body at t = 2 s is    10
2

25. In a certain oscillatory system (particle is performing SHM), the amplitude of motion is 5m and the
time period is 4s. If the minimum time taken by the particle for passing between points, which are at
distances of 4m and 3m from the centre and on the same side of it is t. Find 90t.

114
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 11
WAVES

SYNOPSIS
When a disturbance is made in an elastic medium the particles of the medium are disturbed successively
and put into SHM. At any instant the disturbed particles are in different states of SHM. A line joining all
the disturbed particles at an instant will form a wave.
The length of a full wave is called wave length (  )  is defined as the distance between two successive
particles on a wave having the same state of vibration.
 is also defined as the distance moved by the wave in the time taken for one SHM, called the time
period (T).
Two particles on a wave separated by  distance have a difference of one SHM, equivalent to a
difference of (2  ) radians or 360o.
ie, if the distance between two particles on a wave is  . they have a phase difference of (2  )
radians.
A transverse wave is produced by alternate crest and trough. Distance between successive crests or
successive troughs is  .
Distance from a crest to next trough =  /2
Any vibrating body is a source of sound. The sound energy produced by the source moves in any
medium in the form of a longitudinal wave and it will be a progressive wave. To move, a sound wave
requires a material medium and sound wave does not move in vacuum.
If  is the frequency of the source and  is the wave length, velocity of the sound wave is given by

V  
Depending upon the frequency of the source sound produced is divided into three groups namely.
1. Infrasonic sound
2. Audible sound
3. Ultrasonic sound
If  of the source is in the range, 0 - 20 Hz. Sound is called infrasonic and it cannot be heard.
If  of the source is in the range 20 - 20000 Hz, sound is called audible sound and it can be heard
If  of the source is larger than 20000 Hz, sound is ultrasonic and it cannot be heard.
In the same medium all the sound wave move with same velocity, but  and  are different.
If  is minimum  is maximum and vice versa

115
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Factors affecting velocity of sound wave in a medium

1. Bulk modulus (B) or Elasticity
As elasticity of a medium increases velocity of wave in the medium increases and vice versa
2. Density (  )
As density of medium increases velocity of wave in the medium decreases and vice versa
Velocity of a sound wave in a medium of bulk modulus (B) and density (  ) is given by

B
v


According to Newton a sound wave moves through a medium isothermally. Then elasticity of the
medium is isothermal = Pressure (P) of the medium

P
Then v  , called Newton’s equation. But v calculated from Newtons eqn. is not the same as in

experiment. Therefore Newton’s eqn. is wrong, means sound wave is not moving isothermally in a
medium.
According to Laplace a sound wave moves through a medium adiabatically. Then elasticity of the
C
medium is adiabatic =  x P, where  = P > 1
CV

E(adiabatic) P
Then v   , called Laplace’s eqn. v calculated from Laplace’s eqn. is the same
 
as in expt.
 Laplace’s eqn is correct, means sound wave moves through a medium adiabatically..
3. Pressure (P)
P
v

FG P IJ
As the pressure P changes, density  proportionately changes. Then  will be a constant. For a
H K
medium  is a constant. Therefore v is a constant. It means at all pressures of a medium, velocity of
the wave is same or velocity is independent of pressure of the medium.
4. Temperature (T)
As temperature of the medium increases, velocity of the wave in the medium increases and vice
versa.

v  T where T is the absolute temperature.


5. Humidity v 

As humidity in air increases density of air decrease and velocity of wave in air increases and vice
versa.
PV  nRT
For 1 mole of medium
n=1
 PV = RT, where V, is the molar volume = 22.4 liters, same for all gases.

116
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

If molar mass = M and molar volume = V

density  bg M
V

P P  (PV)  RT
V   V 
 M/V M M
Progressive wave
A progressive wave moving in the positive direction is represented by the equation
2
y  A sin  vt  x 


 v 2   2 
ie y  A sin  2 .t  .x   A sin  (2v)t  .x 
      
2
ie y  Asin  t  Vx  Where   2  and k  .

A progressive wave moving in the negative direction is represented by the equation.
2
y  A sin  vt  x  or y  A sin  t  kx 

Characteristics of Sound
A musical sound has three characteristics namely
1. Pitch of sound
2. Loudness of sound
3. Quality or Timbre
Intensity of a Wave

I  A2 A  Amplitude
I also depends upon the distance (d) between source and listener. As d increases I decreases and
vice versa.
I  1 2
d
The SI unit of intensity is w/m2. However as human ear respond to sound intensities over a
wide range, ie from 10–12 W/m2 to 1 W/m2. So instead of specifying intensity of sound in W/m2,
we use a logarithmic scale of intesity called sound level defined as
I
SL  10 log  
 I0 
Where I0 is the threshold of human ear. ie 10–12 W/m2
We also use dB as a relative measure to compare different sounds with one another, rather
than with reference intensity.
What is the intensity of a 60 dB sound

N  10 log10 I  60  10 log10 I
I0 I0

117
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

I
log10 I 6 or  106
I0 I0
I0 = 10–12 w/m2

I = 106 I0 = 106 × 10–12 = 10–6 W/m2

Two sound waves have intensities 5 × 10–10 W/m2 and 1 × 10–6 W/m2. By how many decibels
is the louder sound above the other?
I1 = 5 × 10–10 w/m2
I2 = 1 × 10–6 w/m2
it is obvious that I2 is louder than I1

I1 I2
N1  10 log10 N 2  10 log10
I0 I0

I2 I1
N 2  N1  10 log10  10 log10
I0 I0

= 10  log10 I 2  log I0   (log10 I1  log I0 )]

= 10  log10 I 2  log10 I1 

I2
= 10 log10 I1

106
= 10 log10  10log10  2  103 
5  1010

= 10  log10 2  3

= 10[.3010 + 3] = 10 × 3.301
= 33 dB
Superposition of waves
When two waves are produced simultaneously in the same medium they superpose each other
producing a resultant wave.

If A1 and A2 are the amplitudes and  is the phase difference of the two superposing waves, the
resultant amplitude A of the resultant wave is given by

A  A12  A 2 2  2A1A 2 cos 

If  = 0, A = A1 + A2, the maximum amplitude

118
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

ie, A m ax = A 1 + A 2

If  = 180, A = A1 – A2, the minimum amplitude

ie, A m in = A 1 – A 2

Beats
When two vibrating bodies having nearly equal frequencies 1 and 2 are put into vibration together
the intensity of the resultant sound increases to a maximum called waxing, decreases to a minimum
called wanning. The variation in intensity between maximum and minimum produces beats.
Number of beats/second = 1  2 .
1
The time interval between successive maximum or successive minimum =    .
1 2

1 1
Time interval between a maximum and next minimum = 2    
1 2

Stationary or Standing wave

When two similar waves are simultaneously produced along the same line in opposite directions they
superpose each other producing a resultant wave. The resultant wave does not move in the medium
and hence it is called a stationary wave.
The amplitude of particles on a stationary wave varies from zero at a point called node to a maximum
at a point called antinode.


Distance between successive nodes or antinodes = .
2

Distance from a node to the next antinode = .
4
Usually a stationary wave is produced by superposing a progressive wave and its own reflected wave.
If progressive wave is represented by
y1  Asin  t  kx  its reflected wave is y   Asin  t  kx 
Since amplitude of each superposing wave is A, maximum amplitude at an antinode = A1 + A2 = A + A = 2A.
Then stationary wave is represented by the equation, y = y1 + y2.
 2 x  
ie, y  2A  cos   .sin t 
    
The stationary wave represented by this equation has an antinode at x = 0.

A stationary wave may also be represented by the equation,

 2x 
y  2A sin   .cos t
  
119
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The stationary wave represented by this equation has a node at x = 0.

Vibration of a stretched wire

Fundamental vibration or 1st mode
AB is a stretched wire of length l m, tension T newton and mass per unit length or linear density  .

When it is put into vibration as shown, it produces a sound. The velocity of the sound wave is given by
T
v .

The whole length of the wire vibrates in one segment. Then A and B are successive nodes.
 v
Therefore, AB  l   = 2l v   or  
2 
v
 Frequency  is called the fundamental frequency or 1st Harmonic.
2l

1 T
or   2l 

2nd mode

There are two segments in the wire. The frequency of vibration is given by, 1  2  .

1 is called the 1st overtone and  2   is called 2nd harmonic.

 1st overtone = 2nd harmonic
3rd mode

There are three segments in the wire.

The frequency of vibration is given by  2  3   .
 2nd overtone = 3rd harmonic
[NB: The number of segments in the wire give the number of mode of vibration. The frequency of nth
mode of vibration is nth harmonic, where n = 1, 2, 3, etc.
nth overtone = (n + 1) harmonic
In a stretched wire all the harmonics can be heard and hence the quality of sound is rich.]
1 T

2l 
From the above equation the three laws of transverse vibration of a string are concluded.
1
1.   , when T and m are constants.
l

120
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2.   T , when l and m are constants.

1
3.   
, when l and T are constants.

VIBRATION OF AIR COLUMNS

The air inside an empty pipe is called air column. The length of air column is equal to the length of empty
pipe. When the air column in a pipe is put into vibration a stationary wave is formed inside the pipe, with a
node at the closed end and an antinode at the open end of the pipe
Closed Pipe: Ist Mode

v
   / 4 ;   4 ; v =  ; or   

v
  .  is called the 1st harmonic or fundamental frequency
4

2nd mode 3rd mode

Frequency of vibration is 1 = 3   Frequency of vibration is,

ie 1st overtone = 3rd Harmonic 2 = 5 

ie 2nd overtone = 5th Harmonic

NB: Number of nodes inside the pipe gives the number of mode of vibration
The frequency of nth mode of vibration is (2n – 1) harmonic where n = 1, 2, 3.....
nth overtone is equal to (2n + 1) Harmonic
In a closed pipe only the odd multiples of harmonics can be heard, no even multiples are heard. Therefore
quality of sound is poor
121
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Open pipe: Ist mode

v
   / 2 ;   2 ;   v /  ;  
2
.  is called 1st Harmonic or fundamental frequency

2nd Mode 3rd Mode

[NB : Number of nodes inside the pipe gives the number of mode of vibration.
The frequency of nth mode of vibration is nth Harmonic, where n = 1, 2, 3 etc
nth overtone = (n + 1) harmonic
In an open pipe all the harmonics can be heard and hence the quality of sound is rich]
End correction (e)

When the air column in a pipe is put into vibration the antinode is forming not exactly at the open end, but a
little above the open end. The distance of antinode from the open end is called end correction given by [e =
0.3  d], where d is the diameter of the tube
Resonance experiment
When the two vibrating bodies vibrate with same frequency, resonance takes place and at resonance intensity
of sound will be maximum.
In resonance experiment the frequency of the tunning fork and the frequency of vibrating air column are
same, when resonance taken place.
Let  be the frequency of the tunning fork. If l1 and l2 are the 1st and 2nd resonating lengths of air coulmns,
the wave length of the wave forming inside the tube is given by

122
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

  2   2  1  . Where   distance between successive antinodes.

2
Then velocity of sound wave is given by
v  

i.e. u    2   2   1 

The end correction at the open end of pipe is given by

 2  31
e
2
Doppler effect
When the source and the listner approach each other or recede each other there is a relative motion
between them.
Due to the relative motion between the source and the listner the frequency 1 of the sound heard by
the listener is appeared either to increase or to decrease from the frequency n of the source. This
apparent change in frequency 1 is called Doppler effect.

If the source and the listner approach each other 1 is appeared to increase. Then l   .

If the source and the listner recede each other 1 is appeared to decrease. Then l  

 When there is Doppler effect,  l  

If u is the velocity of sound, us is velocity of the source and ul is velocity of the listner,

u  u
1    , called general equation of Doppler effect
u  us

Interval - implies the ratio of two frequencies. If the interval is 1, the two vibrating bodies are said to exist
in unison (n2 = n1). If the interval is 2, n2 is said to be an octave higher and so if interval is 2n, n2 will be
n octave higher.
Acoustics of Buildings
Acoustics is the branch of physics that deals with the generation, propagation and reception of sound.
Reverberation
Phenomenon of persistence or prolongation of sound in the auditorium is called reverberation.
Reverberation time
The time gap between the initial direct note and reflected note upto minimum audibility level is called
reverberation time.
Sabine law
V
Sabine derived an expression of reverberation time which is t  K , where K is constant
s
V = volume of the hall, s = surface area exposed to the sound,  = coefficient of absorption.

123
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION-I

1. A simple harmonic wave is represented as


y = 5 sin (100t  2x)
2

x, y are in metres, t in seconds

The ratio of wave velocity to maximum particle velocity will be

1) 1 : 2  2) 1 : 3  3) 1 : 4  4) 1 : 5 

2. Two waves traveling in a medium in the x - direction are represented by y1 = A sin  t   x  and

 
y 2  A cos  x  t   , where y1 and y2 are the displacements of the particles of the medium, t is
 4
time, and  and  are constants. The two waves have different

1) speeds 2) directions of propagation

3) wavelengths 4) frequencies

3. The displacement of particles in a string stretched in the x - direction is represented by y. Among the
following expressions for y, which can possibly represent travelling wave is

 x  vt 
1) cos kx sin t 2) (x–vt)2 3) log   4) None of these
 xo 

4. Figure shows a snap shot of a sincisoidal travelling wave taken at t = 0.3s. The wavelength is 7.5 cm
and the amplitude is 2 cm. If the crest P was at x = 0 at t = 0, then the equation of travelling wave is

1) 2 cos (0.84 x- 3.36t) 2) 2 cos (0.84x + 3.36t)

3) 2 sin (0.84 x - 3.36 t) 4) 2 sin (o.84 x + 3.36 t)

124
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

5. Both the strings shown in figure are made of same material and have same cross section. The
pulleys are light. The wavespeed of transverse wave in the string AB is V1 and in CD is V2

V1
Then
V2 is

1
1) 1 2) 2 3) 2 4)
2

6. A uniform rope of length 10m and mass 15 kg hangs vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass
5 kg is attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse pulse of wavelength 0.08 m is produced at
lower end of the rope. The wavelength of the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope will be

1) 0.08 m 2) 0.04 m 3) 0.16 m 4) 0m

7. Two waves
X1 = A sin (wt - 0.1 x) and


X2 = A sin (wt - 0.1 x - )
2
Super imposes. Resultant amplitude of combined wave is

   
1) 2A cos   2) A 2 cos   3) 2A cos 4) A 2(1  cos )
4 4 2 2

125
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. A wave pulse on a string has the dimension shown in figure. The wave speed is V = 1 cm/s. If point o
is a free end. The shape of wave at time t = 3s is

1) 2)

3) 4)

9.

Two strings connected as shown in the figure. Find the fraction of incident power transmitted

1 4 7 8
1) 2) 3) 4)
9 9 9 9

126
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

10. In each of four situation of column 1 a strethed string or an organ pipe is given along with required
data. In case of strings the tension in the string is T = 102.4 N mass per unit length is 1g/m. Speed of
sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequencies of resonance are given in column II
Match the following
Column I Column II

i) a) 320 Hz

ii) b) 480 Hz

iii) c) 640 Hz

iv) d) 800 Hz

1) i - a, c ii-d iii-a iv - c 2) i - a, c ii-b, d iii - a, c iv - b, d

3) i -c ii - b iii-a iv - c 4) i - a, c ii - d iii - a iv - d
11. Stationary waves are produced in 10m long stretched string. If the string vibrates in 5 segments and
wave velocity 20m/s then the frequency is
1) 10Hz 2) 5Hz 3) 4Hz 4) 2Hz
12. The length of a sonometer wire between two fixed end is 1.10 m. Where should the two bridges be
placed to divide the wire into three segments whose fundamental frequencies are in the ratio 1 : 2: 3
1) 0.6 m and 0.9 m 2) 0.2 m and 0.4 m 3) 0.6 m and 0.8 m 4) 0.3 ma and 0.6 m
13. An underwater sonar source operating at a frequency of 60kHz directs its beam towards the surface.
If velocity of sound air is 330m/s, wavelength and frequency of the waves in air are:
1) 5.5 mm, 60kHz 2) 3.30m, 60kHz 3) 5.5 mm, 30kHz 4) 5.5mm, 80 kHz
14. A source of sound is in the shape of a long narrow cylinder radiating sound waves normal to the axis
of the cylinder. Two points P and Q are at perpendicular distances of 9m and 25m from the axis. The
ratio of the amplitudes of the waves at P and Q is

1) 5:3 2) 5: 3 3) 3:5 4) 25:9

127
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. Two open pipes of length 25 cm and 25.5cm produced 0.1 beat/second. The velocity of sound will
be:-
1) 255cm/s 2) 250cm/s 3) 350cm/s 4) None of these
16. A closed organ pipe of radius r1 and an open organ pipe of radius r2 and having same length L
resonate when excited with a given tuning fork. Closed organ pipe resonates in its fundamental mode
where as open organ pipe resonates in its first overtone, then:-
1) r2 = r1 = L 2) r2 = r1 = L/2 3) r2 = 2r1 = 2.5 L 4) 2r2 - r1 = 2.5 L
17. The maximum length of a closed pipe that would produce a just audible sound is (vsound = 336m/s):-
1) 4.2cm 2) 4.2m 3) 4.2mm 4) 1.0cm
18. How many times more intense is 90 d B sound than 40 d B sound
1) 5 2) 50 3) 500 4) 105
19. 1) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is correct explanation of assertion
2) Both assertion and reason are correct but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
3) Assertion is incorrect but reason is correct
4) Assertion is correct and reason is incorrect
Assertion : Two longitudanals waves given by equations y1 = 2 a sin (wt - kx)
and y2 = a sin (2 wt - 2 Kx) will have equal intensity
Reason : Intensity of waves of given frequency in same medium is propotional to square of amplitude
only

20. Two sound waves represented by y1  4sin 200t and y 2  3sin 208t super impose each other..
The beat frequency and ratio of maximum to minimum intensity are

7 49 4 16
1) 8and 2) 4 and 3) 4 and 4) 8and
1 1 3 9
SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a rigid support. A short wave pulse is introduced at
its lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The time taken to reach the support is n sec . Then
value of n is ______

22. A wire of linear mass density 9  103 kg / m is stretched between two rigid supports under tension of
360N. The wire resonates at frequecny 210 Hz. The next higher frequency at which same wire resonate
is 280Hz. The number of loops produced in the Ist case will be

1
23. The speed of sound in hydrogen is X × 3 32 m/s at NTP if density of hydrogen is th of that of air..
4
Find value of x if speed of sound in air is 332 m/s at NTP
24. Frequency of tuning fork A is 256Hz. It produces 4 beats/ second with tuning fork B. When was is
applied at tuning fork B trhen 6 beats /second are heard. Frequency of B is
25. A tuning of frequency 200 Hz is in unison with a sonometer wire. the number of beats are heared in
30s if the tension is increased by 1% is 10 n. Then n is equal to

128
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 12
ELECTROSTATICS AND CAPACITANCE

SYNOPSIS
Electrostatics is the branch of physics which deals with electric charges at rest. There are two types of
charges +ve and –ve. Like charges repell and unlike charges attract. Unit of charge is coulomb (C) in
SI. In C.G.S the unit is stat coulomb or electrostatic unit of charge (esu of charge)
Electrification by friction
When two substances are rubbed together, electrons are transferred from one body to the other. The
transfer of electrons takes place from the material in which electrons are held less tightly to the nucleus
to the materials where electrons are held more tightly. The substance which loses electrons become
+ve and the one which gains electrons become –vely charged
Properties of charges
1. Quantization
2. Additive property
3. Charge conservation
4. Speed independence
Difference between mass and charge
1. Charge can be +ve, –ve or zero, but mass is always +ve
2. Charge is quantized. Mass is not strictly quantized
3. Charge is independent of speed. Mass increases with speed as

m0
m
v2 m0– rest mass
1
c2

m – mass when moving with a velocity v

c – velocity of light
Similarities between gravitational and electrostatic field
Both are
1. Central forces 2. Conservative
3. Inverse square law forces 4. Long range forces
5. Two body interaction
129
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Difference
Electrostatic force Gravitational force
1. May be attractive or repulsive Always attractive
2. Affected by the medium Not affected by the medium
3. Of strong magnitude Of weak magnitude
Note that the electrostatic force between the electron and proton is 1038 times as large as the gravitational
force between them for equal distance of separation
Coulomb’s law
The force of attraction or repulsion between two charges q1 and q2 is directly proportional to the product
of the charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them

q1q 2 1 q1q 2
F F
r 2
4 0 r 2

1 2 2
 0 is the absolute permittivity of free space (air or vacuum) 4  9  10 Nm C
9

1 q1q 2
When the charges are kept in a medium other than air or vacuum, F  4  r 2
0 r

 r is the relative permittivity or dielectric constant of the medium. 0 r  is the absolute permittivity of
the medium

Fair
r
Fmedium
The force between two charges will be reduced to zero if a metal plate is introduced between them. For
metals r  

0  8.854  1012 C2 N 1m 2

Principle of superposition
When a number of charges are interacting, the total force on a given charge is the vector sum of the
individual forces exerted on the given charge by all the other charges.
Electricfield
The space surrounding a charge where another charge experiences a force is known as an electric

 
field. The intensity of the electric field E at a point is the force experienced by a unit +ve charge (+1C)
placed at that point. The magnitude of the intensity of the electric field at a point P due to a point charge
is given by

1 q
E
40 r 2
where r is the distance of the point from the point charge. The force experienced by a charge of q

coulomb placed in an electric field strength E is given by
 
F  qE

130
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)


 qE
Acceleration of a charged particle in an electricfield a 
m

Unit of E is NC–1 or Vm–1
[E] = [I–1 MLT–3]
Properties of electric lines of force
1. Electric lines start from a +ve charge and ends on a –ve charge
2. Electric lines do not intersect each other
3. The tangent at any point on the electric line gives the direction of the electric field at that point
4. The number of lines of force passing normally through unit area taken around a point gives the
intensity of the electricfield at that point. It is also known as the electric flux density.
5. In a uniform electric field electric lines are parallel and equidistant from each other
6. Lines of force always start normal to a surface and end normal to a surface
Electric dipole

Two equal and opposite charges separated by a small vector distance form an electric dipole. The
length of the dipole is a vector quantity. Its direction is from the –ve to the +ve charge. The length AB of

the dipole is represented by 2a .

Electric dipole moment P
It is the product of one of the charges and the distance between the charges.

(length of the dipole is 2a )
 
P  q  2a
It is a vector quantity. Its direction is from –ve to +ve charge
Intensity of the electric field at a point on the axial line

1 2Pr
E
4 0  r 2  a 2 2 . If a<< r(ie short dipole)

1 2P
E
40 r 3
Intensity of the electric field at a point on the equational line

1 P 1 P
E E 
40  r  a 
2 2 3/ 2 ; If a<<r,
40 r 3

For a short dipole Eaxial =2 E equatorial

The direction of the electric field is antiparallel to the direction of the length of the dipole

131
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Null point
A null point in an electric field is the point where the resultant field is zero
a) when two like charge are separated by a distance the null point will be:
(1) on the line joining the charges
(2) in between the charges
(3) nearer to the smaller charge

q1 q 2
Also, r 2  r 2 where r1 and r2 are the distance of the null point from q1 and q2
1 2

If q1 =q2 null point will be at the centre

(b) When two unlike charge are separated by a distance the null point will be
(1) on the line joining the charges
(2) outside the charges
(3) nearer to the smaller charge

q1 q 2
Also, r 2  r 2 where r1 and r2 are the distance of the null point from the charges. If q1= q2 there will be
1 2

no null point.
Torque acting on an electric dipole placed in a uniform electric field

  
Torque   PE sin  ie   P  E

(i) When the dipole is in stable equilibrium,  = 180o,  = PE sin 180o = 0

(ii) When the dipole is perpendicular to the field,   PE sin90 = PE
This is the maximum torque.
(iii) When the dipole is in unstable equillibrium
 = 180o,  = PE sin 180o = 0
 
In stable equilibrium, E is parallel to P
 
In unstable equilibrium, E is antiparallel to P
Work done in rotating a dipole from 1 to 2 in a uniform electric field. (Potential energy of an electric
dipole placed in a uniform electric field)
W= pE  cos 1  cos 2 
 1 - initial
 2 - final

132
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

If 1 = 900 and 2   , W = –pE cos 

Electric potential : V at a point in an electricfield is the amount of work done in bringing a unit +ve charge
(+1C) from infinity to that point against the direction of the field
r
  W
V    E . dr V is a scalar quantity V  –1

q . Unit of V is JC (volt)
[V] = I–1 ML2 T–3
Potential difference between two points in an electric field is the amount of work done to bring a unit
+ve charge from one point to the other against the direction of the field
dV = VB – VA
Equipotential surface is the surface over which the electric potential remains the same
On an equipotential surface the p.d between any two points is zero. Hence no work is done in moving
a test charge on an equipotential surface
The electric field (ie, electric lines) are perpendicular to an equipotential surface
dv
Potential gradient is the rate of change of potential w.r.t distance, ie . It is a vector quantity
dr

dV
Electric field E 
dr
In a constant electric field E  r = V
Unit of electric field is Vm–1
Unit of potential gradient also is Vm–1
Potential at a point due to a point charge is
1 q
V
4 0 r
Potential due to a large number of charges q1, q2, ...... is,
1 q1 1 q2
V  
4 0 r1 4 0 r
Potential due to a uniformly charged conducting spherical shell (or a conducting solid sphere) of
radius R:
1. Potential at any point outside the shell at a distance r from the centre
1 q
V
4 0 r

1 q
2. On the surface of the shell, V 
40 R

1 q
3. Inside the shell, V  4 R
0

133
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Electric potential due to an electric dipole (short dipole)

1. At any point,

1 pcos 
V
40 r 2

1 p
2. Vaxial = 4 r 2
0

3. Vequitorial = 0
Potential energy of a system of two charges

1 q1q 2
U
4 0 r

Potential energy = Potential  charge

Potential energy of system of three charges
U = U12 + U23 + U13

1  q1q 2 q 2 q3 q1q3 
= 4    
0  r12 r23 r13 

Electric flux (  ) through an area (surface) in an electric field is the number of lines of force passing
  
normally through the area. Flux through an area ds is given by d  E.ds ie, d  Eds cos 

Flux is a scalar quantity. Note that the direction of area is normal to the area taken

1
Gauss’s theorem : The total electric flux through any closed surface enclosing a charge is equal to 
0

times the total charge enclosed by the surface

  1
   E .ds  .q
0
Applications
1 q
1. Electric field due to a point charge = 4 r 2
0

134
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2. Electric field due to an infinitely long line charge,


E
20 r
3. Electric field due to an infinite thin plane sheet of charge

E
2 0
4. Electric field due to two infinite parallel sheets of charge with equal but opposite charge densities,
(i) outside the sheets = 0

(ii) in between the sheets = 
0

5. Electric field due to a charged nonconducting solid sphere of radius R:

1 q
(i) outside the sphere (r > R) E
40 r 2

1 q
(ii) on the sphere (r = R) E
4 0 R 2

1 q
(iii) inside the sphere (r < R) E r
4 0 R 3

6. Electricfield due to a charged conducting shell (or conducting sphere) of radius R

1 q
(i) outside the shell (r > r), E  4 r 2
0

1 q
(ii) on the sphere (r = R), E  4  R 2
0

(iii) inside the sphere (r < R) E = 0

Electrostatic shielding is the vanishing of the electric field inside a conducting cavity

135
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Capacitor or condenser
It is a device for storing large amount of electric charges. Charge stored in a capacitor, q = CV
C – capacitance or capacity
q
C  unit is CV–1 (Farad)
V
Parallel plate capacitor

0 A
(i) Air capacitor, Capacitance C =
d

E
0
V=E  d
(ii) Capacitor with a dielectric,
0 KA
C 
d
ie C = C  K K is the dielectric constant


E  For metals K = 
0 K
For vacuum K =1
V  E  d For Air K = 1.00059
 1
Combination of capacitors
(i) Parallel

Potential difference across all the condensers will be the same, but charge will be different
q1 = C1V, q2 = C2V, q3 = C3V
Effective capacitance, Ceff = C1 + C2 + C3

(ii) Series

Potential difference on different capacitors will be different, but the charge will be the same
136
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

q q q
V1  , V2  , V3 
C1 C2 C3
The effective capacitance Ceff is
1 1 1 1
  
Ceff C1 C 2 C3
Energy of a charged capacitor is the amount of work done in charging the capacitor
1 1 Q2
U  CV 2 U  QV U
2 2 2C
Van de Graff Generator
It is used for accelerating charged particles
Principle
(i) Corona discharge (action of sharp points)
(ii) Charge given to the a hollow conducting sphere will be transferred to the outer surface of the sphere
V
The minimum radius of spherical shell R  where E is the dielectric strength of the surrounding gas.
E
Dielectric strength is defined as the maximum electric field that can be applied to a dielectric without its
breakdown
Molecule as a dipole
If the +ve charge centre doesn’t coincide with the –ve charge centre, the molecule will have a dipole
moment. Such molecules are called polar molecules.
In non-polar molecules, the +ve and –ve charge centers coincide
Motion of a charged particle in an electric field
(i) A charged particle moving along the direction of the electric field
qE
A +ve charged particle will move along the direction of the field with an acceleration of
m
A –ve charged particle will move more along the direction of the field with a deceleration of qE/m
Velocity after t seconds v = u + at
(ii) A charged particle entering perpendicular to a uniform electric field

The path of the charged particle inside the electricfield is a parabola. Let t be the time spent by the
particle inside the field. Initial velocity vx is in the X – direction. Velocity acquired in the Y-direction is vy.
Sy is the displacement in the Y-direction. Sx is displacement in the X-direction within the field. Then
vy = uy + at But uy = 0  vy = at
1 2
Sy = ur + 1 at
2 But uy = 0  Sy = at
2 2
Sx = vx t

137
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

1. Three charges 4 q, Q and q are in a straight line in the positions 0,  2 and  respectively. Resultant
force at q will be zero if Q is equal to

1) -q 2) -2q 3) -q/2 4) 4q

2. A charge q is placed at the centroid of an equilateral triangle. Three charges equal to Q are placed at
the vertices of the triangle. The system of four charges will be in equilibrium if q is equal to

1) Q 3 2) Q / 3 3)  Q / 3 4) Q / 3

3. The charges 9e and 3e are placed at a distance r. The distance of the point where the electric field
intensity will be zero is

r r
1) from 3e charge 2) from 9e charge
3 1 3 1

r r
3) from 3e charge 4) from 9e charge
3 1 3 1

4. Two concentric conducting thin shells of radius R and 2R carry charges +Q and +3Q respectively. The
magnitude of electric field at points A and B at a distance x outside and inside from the surface of outer
sphere is same. Then the value of x is

R 2R R R
1) 2) 3) 4)
3 3 4 2

5. Two identical small bodies each of mass m and charge q are suspended from two strings each of
length l from a fixed point. This whole system is taken into an artificial satellite. Then the tension in
strings is

kq 2 kq 2 kq 2 kq 2
1)  2mg 2)  2mg 3) 4)
l2 4l 2 l2 4l 2
138
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

6. Five identical charges +q are placed at five corner of a regular hexagon of side a. Find the magnitude
of electric field at centre

q q 5q 5q
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 0 a 2 2 0 a 2 4 0 a 2 2 0 a 2
7. A uniform horizontal electric field E is established in the space between two large vertical parallel
plates. A small conducting sphere of mass m is suspended in the field from a string of length L. If the
sphere is given charge +q, then the period of oscillation of the pendulum is

L L L
2
1) 2 L g 2) 2 3) 2 4)
g 2   qE / m 
2
g  qE / m g  qE / m

8. Three infinitely long charge sheets are placed as shown in figure. The electric field at point P is

2 2 4 4
1) k̂ 2)  k̂ 3) k̂ 4)  k̂
0 0 0 0

9. A point charge of 6 C is placed at a distance 20 cm directly above the centre of a square of side 40
cm. The magnitude of the flux through the square is

1 1
1) 0 2) 3)  0  106 4)  10 6
0 0
10. A small spherically symmetric charge q is placed at one vertex of a cube as shown. The flux through
the faces ABCD and HGFE are, respectively

q q q q q
1) , 2) 0, 3) ,0 4) ,0
24 0 240 80 8 0 24 0

139
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

11. Three charges Q, +q and +q are placed at the vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle as shown in
figure. The net electrostatic energy of the configuration is zero if Q is equal to

q 2q
1) 2) 3) -2q 4) +q
1 2 2 2
12. An external agency carries -5C of charge from infinity to a point in an electrostatic field and performs
100 Joules of work. The potential at the given point is
1) +10V 2) -10V 3) +20 V 4) -20 V
13. A point charge q is placed at a distance of r from the centre of an uncharged conducting sphere of
radius R (<r). The potential at any point on the sphere is

1 q 1 qR 1 qr 2
1) zero 2) . 3) . 4) .
4 0 r 4 0 r 2 4 0 R

14. If the given figure shows equipotential surfaces, then the magnitude of electric field is

1) 50 N/C 2) 100 N/C 3) 200 N/C 4) 400 N/C

15. Two short dipoles, each of dipole moment p, are placed at origin. The dipole moment of one dipole is
along x-axis, while that of other is along y-axis. The magnitude of electric field at a point (a,0) is given
by

 1  2p  1 p  1  5P
1)   3 2)   3 3)   3 4) zero
 4 0  a  40  a  40  a

140
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

16. Find the magnitude of dipole moment of the following system

1) 21 aq 2) zero 3) 4 aq 4) 10 aq

17. Three concentric spherical conductors are arranged as shown in figure. The potential at point P will be

1  Q1 Q 2 Q3  1  Q1  Q 2 Q3 
    
40  r 40  r
1) 2)
r r  c 

1  Q1 Q 2 Q3  1
     Q1  Q 2  Q3 
40  a
3) 4)
b c  4 0 c

 
18. In a region, if electric field is defined as E  ˆi  2ˆj  kˆ v / m then the potential difference between two
pontes A(0,0,0) and B (2,3,4) in that region, is

1) 6V 2) 12 V 3) 8V 4) 9V

K1
19. Two medium of dielectric constant K1 and K2 are introduced according to given figure. If  3 then
K2
calculate ratio of capacity of part A and part B. (Area of each plate is A)

1) 1 : 9 2) 4 : 1 3) 9 : 1 4) 1 : 4

141
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are charged up to 100 volt. A 2mm, thick dielectric plate is
inserted between the plates, then to maintain the same potential difference, the distance between the
capacitor plate is increased by 1.6mm. The dielectric constant of the plate is:-

1) 5 2) 1.25 3) 4 4) 2.5

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge Q distributed in its volume with charge density   kr a , where
k and a are positive constants and r is the distance from its centre. If the electric field at r = R/2 is 1/
8 times that at r = R, the value of a is

22. Two identically charged spheres are suspended by strings of equal length. The strings make an angle
of 2 with each other. When suspended in a liquid of density 900 kg/m3, the angle remains the same.
What is the dielectric constant of the liquid if the density of the material of the spere is 1200 kg/m3?

23. Three concentric spherical metallic shells A, B and C of radii a,b and c (a<b<c) have surface charge
densities ,  and  respectively. A and C are at the same potential. If a = 7cm and b = 17 cm, then
the value of c-(a+b) in cm is

24. Three capacitors of capacitance 6F each are available. The minimum and maximum capacitance,
which may be obtained are...................

25. The figure shows two identical parallel plate capacitors connected to a battery with the swithc S
closed. The switch is now opened and the free space between the plates of the capacitors is filled
with a dielectric of dielectric constant (or relative permittivity) 3. Of the ratio of the total electrostatic
energy stored in both capacitors before and after the introduction of the dielectric is x/y. Find x + y.

142
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 13
CURRENT ELECTRICITY

SYNOPSIS
Electric current through a conductor is defined as the time rate of flow of charge through any cross
q
section of a conductor. If q is the charge flowing in time t, then current I  . (for steady current) Unit of
t
current is Ampere. Current is a scalar quantity.

dq
• If the rate of flow of charge varies with time, then the current at any time is given by I 
dt
Electromotive force
To maintain a steady current, we need a closed circuit with a source. The work done per unit charge by
the source in taking a positive charge from lower to higher potential energy is called electromotive force
or emf of the source.
OR
It is the p.d between the two terminals of a source in open circuit. SI unit of e.m.f is volt. (V)
Ohm’s law
At constant temperature, the electric current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the
potential difference across the two ends of the conductor.
ie V  I
V = IR. Where the constant of proportionality R is called the resistance of the conductor.
V
* Resistance is the opposition to the current flow in a conductor. R  Its unit is V/A or ohm.(  ) (Define
I
one ohm). Conductors which obey Ohm’s law are known as ohmic conductors. Eg: Silver, Copper,
Aluminium

V - I characterstic of ohmic conductor.

Factors affecting the resistance
The resistance of a conductor depends on its
i) length ii) area of cross section,
iii) nature of the material and, iv) temperature.

143
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Law of resistance - The resistance of a conductor is directly proportional to its length (l) and inversely
proportional to its area of cross section (A)
1 
R  , R  R 
A A
.
R Where  is a constant known as resistivity or specific resistance.
A

RA  E
 

Its unit is ohm metre (  - m). [Find its dimension] Also    
 J
If l = 1 and A = 1, then  = R
Resistivity of the material of a conductor is defined as the resistance of the conductor of unit length and of
unit area of cross section.
1
• Resistivity depends on the nature of the material (   ; n  no. of free electrons per unit volume)
n
• Resistivity increases with the increase in temperature of the conductor.

• Resistivity is independent of geometrical dimensions (ie length, area, shape etc.)

• Substances having low resistivity are conducters of electricity.
• Substances having high resistivity are insulators.
Conductance
1 A
G  1
The reciprocal of resistance is called conductance. It is denoted by G. R  . SI unit is  or
mho
Conductivity
Conductivity a material is its ability to conduct electric current. Conductivity is the reciprocal of resistivity.
1
 . Its unit is  1m 1 or mho m-1.

Temperature dependance of Resistance
1
For a conductor, R  where R  Resistance,   Relaxation time

When a metallic conductor is heated, vibration of atoms increases and collision increases. This reduces
the relaxation time t and increases the value of resistance R.
If R0 be the resistance of a conductor at 0oC and Rt at toC then R t  R 0 1  t 
Where a is called temperature coefficient of resistance of the material
R t  R 0 charge in resistance/degree rise in temperature
 
R0t resistance at 0 o C
Thus the temperature coefficient of resistance can be defined as the ratio of the change in resistance
per unit rise of temperature to the resistance at 0oC. (It’s unit is K-1)

144
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2R R
1
If R1 and R2 are resistances at t1 and t2oC,   R t  R t
1 2 2 1

• For metals  is +ve. Thus metals (conductors) has positive temperature coefficient of resistance.
• For semiconductors  is -ve. (negative temperature coefficient of resistance)
• Due to high resistance and low temperature coefficient of resistance, the alloys like constantan, manganin
and nichrome are used as standard resistance coil.
Combination of resistances
i) Resistance in series
The resistors are said to be in series if the current through each one must be same and equal to main
current.

Let three resistances R1, R2 and R3 are connected in series to a source of potential V. Since they are in
series combination the current through them is same. Let I be the current through the circuit. Let V1, V2
and V3 be the potential difference across the resistances R1, R2 and R3 respectively.
V = V1 + V 2 + V3
But V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2 and V3 = IR3
 V = IR1 + IR2 + IR3 = I(R1 + R2 + R3)
If Rs is the equivalent resistance of their series combination, then V = IRs  IRs= 1(R1 + R2 + R3)
Rs = R1 + R2 + R3
ii) Resistances in parallel
The resistances are said to be in parallel if the p.d across each resistor is the same.
Let three resistance R1, R2 & R3 are connected in parallel to a source of potential difference V. Since
they are in parallel, potential difference across each resistor is same. Let I1 be the current through R1, I2
through R2 and I3 through R3 respectively. Let I be the total current then, I = I1 + I2 + I3
V V V
from Ohm’s law, I1  R , I 2  R & I 3  R
1 2 3

If Rp is the equivalent resistance of the parallel combination,

V V V V V I 1 1 1
I        
Rp R p R1 R 2 R 3 R p R1 R 2 R 3
Potentiometer
It is used for measuring potential difference accurately, comparing e.m.f’s of two cells, measuring inter-
nal resistance of a cell etc. A potentiometer consists of a uniform resistance wire of 10m length, stretched
on a wooden board.
145
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

KIRCHOFF’S LAWS & ITS APPLICATION

Kirchoff’s laws
First law (Point rule, Junction rule)
The algebraic sum of the current meeting at any junction in a closed circuit is zero.
Consider a circuit as shown below

Three currents are meeting at O. Incomming current I1 is taken as +ve and outgoing currents I2 & I3 are
taken as -ve.
Then according to this rule, I1 - I2 - I3 = 0 ie,  I  0
Second law
The algebraic sum of the product of current and resistance in any closed loop is equal to the total e.m.f
in that loop.
Consider a circuit,

Here anticlock wise currents are taken as positive and clockwise current are taken as negative.
Now consider loop ABCDA, I1R1 = E
then ABEFA, I2R3 + I2R2 = E or in general  IR   E
Wheatstone’s Bridge Network
Wheastone’s Bridge is an arrangement of four resistance used for measuring one unknown resistance
in terms of the other three known resistances.
Wheatstone’s Network
P,Q,R and S are four resistors connected to form a loop ABCD. A cell is connected between A and C. A
sensitive galvanometer of resistance G is connected between B and D. The current flowing through
each branch of the circuit is shown in the diagram.

Applying Kirchhoff’s rule to the mesh ABDA. -i1P - igG + i2R=0

146
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

For the loop BCDB, -i3Q + i4S + igG = 0

Now the four resistances are so adjusted so that the galvanometer current ig is zero. Now the network
is said to balanced.
Then, i1 = i3 and i2 = i4
so i1P = i2 R ...................(1) and i3Q = i4S .................(2)
i1P i 2 R P R
1  2 , we get  
i 3 Q i 4S Q S This is Wheatstone’s Principle
Flow of electric charges in a Metalic Conductor
In conductors, valence electrons can move about in whole conductor and are known as free electrons.
When an external field is applied, these free electrons moves in a definite direction constituting an
electric current. Thus electrons are current carries in conductors.
• Since conduction is due to free electrons, these electrons are also called conduction electrons.
Drift Velocity
Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which free electrons in a conductor get drifted in a
direction opposite to the direction of the applied electric field. [It is in the order of 10-5m/s]
• Consider a conductor connected to a cell which provides an electric field in the conductor.
 
The electrons experiences a force F  eE  F  qE here, q  e

  eE
but F = m.a  a 
m
eE
ie, In the presence of an external field, each electron experiences an acceleration opposite to the
m
field direction. This acceleration remains for a very short time (  ), called relaxation time. The small
interval of time between two successive collissions between electrons and ions in the lattice is called
relaxation time. 
   eE  eE
Now drift velocity Vd  u  at  O  . Vd  
m m
• In the absence of electric field, the motion of electrons in the conductor is randomely distributed and
there is no overall drift.
Mobility
Mobility of a charge carrier is defined as the drift veocity of the charge carrier per unit electric field.
Vd
 . [It’s unit is m 2 V 1S 1 ]. Mobility is positive for both free electrons and holes*.
E
e e e h
If me and mh are electron and hole mobilities then  e  m and  h  m
e h
* Holes - Vacancy of an electron which acts like positive charge.
# The electrical conductivity (  )for a semiconductor containing electrons and holes can be represented
as   ne e  pe n .
Relation between drift velocity and electric current
Let V be the potential difference applied across the ends of a conductor with length  and area of cross
section ‘A’.
V
Electric field produced across the conductor E 

Let n be the number of free electrons per unit volume.
The total no. of electrons in the conductor = n  volume of the conductor = n  A 
Now total charge in the conductor, Q=(n.Al )e

let ‘t’ be the time taken by the charge to cross the conductor, t  where Vd  drift velocity
Vd
  length of the conductor (distance)

147
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE
Q
From the definition of electric current I 
t

nAe  I
I  nAVd e
 I  Vd (e, A & n are constants)  Vd 
Vd nAe

Relation between mobility and electric current

Electric current I  nAeVd but Vd   e E

I
 I  nAe .  e E or  e 
nAeE
Cell
Cell is a device which provides the necessary potential difference to maintain a continuous flow of
current in an electric circuit. [Its symbol is ]
emf
EMF of a cell in the potential difference between the terminals of a cell when no current is drawn from it.
Potential difference
Potential difference is the differenc of potentials between any two points in a closed circuit.
Comparison of emf & p.d

emf p.d
emf of a cell is the potential difference Potential difference is the difference of
1 between the terminals of a cell when no potentials between any two points in a closed
current is drawn from it circuit.

2 is independent of resistance of the circuit but pd is directly proportional to resistance

3 term emf is related with a cell p.d is measured between any two points

4 emf is always greater than p.d.

Internal resistance of a cell

The electrical resistance offered by the electrolyte and the electrodes of a cell to the flow of current is
called internal resistance.
Internal resistance of a cell depends on the
i) Separation between the electrodes
ii) Conductivity
iii) Area of the plates
iv) nature of the electrodes

148
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Consider a cell with emf E and internal resistance ‘r’ is connected with a resistance R as shown

E
Then E = I(R + r) or I  (circuit equation)
Rr

E  IR  Ir  V  Ir V  E  Ir
This is the relation between pd, internal resistance and emf of a cell.
Grouping of cells
i) Cells in series
When cells are connected in series,
1) the emf of the battery is equal to the sum of the individual emfs of the various cells.
2) The current in each cell is the same and is equal to the main current through the arrangement.
3) Total internal resistance of the battery is equal to the sum of the individual internal resistances.

Let n cells of emf E and internal resistance (r) are connected in series with R. Then total emf = nE
nE
Then total resistance = R + nr Current I 
nr  R
ii) Cells in parallel
When (n) identical cells are connected in parallel,
1) The emf of the battery is the same as that of a single cell.
2) The reciprocal of total internal resistance of a cell is equal to the sum of the reciprocal of the resistances
of the individual cells.
3) The main current is divided equally among the cells.

I 1 1 n r
Total internal resistance R1 1
  .......... n times  R1 
R r r r n

FG R  r IJ I
E
 Total resistance =
H nK  Current R
r
n
iii) Mixed grouping
Let n cells of emf E and internal resistance r are connected in series and m’ such combination is
connected in parallel.

Total emf = nE

Internal resistance each row = nr

149
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

nr nr nE
Total resistance =  Total resistance = R   Current I 
m m nr
R
m

THERMAL & CHEMICAL EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

I. JOULES HEATING EFFECT

V2
* Heat produced across resistance according to H = I2Rt = t  VIt in Joules
R
I = current, R = resistance, t = time, V = applied voltage

I 2 Rt I 2 Rt
* In calories heat equation is H  Cal 
4.2 J
J = The mechanical equivalent of heat = 4.2 J/Cal
* In this effect heat energy is produced due to the collisions of free electrons with the ions or atoms of the
conductor.
* Joules heating effect is irreversible.
* Heating effect produced by ac and dc are the same.
II. ELECTRIC POWER
* Electric power is the rate at which work is done by the source of emf. Its equations are

V2
P = VI = I2R =
R
* Electricity is always transferred as power from source to device.

So power is transferred with minimum current and maximum voltage.

* Unit of power - Watt or Ampere volt
Horse power 1HP = 746 W
* In series combination of resistors, the power consumed P  R

1 1 1 1
* In series combination of appliances, the effective power consumed P is     .......
P P1 P2 P3

1
* In parallel combination of resistors, the power consumed P
R
* In domestic supply, the appliances are connected in parallel and the effective power consumed is
P = P1 + P2 + P3 + .......

150
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. The resistance of a wire is 10 6  per metre. It is bend in the form of a circle of diameter 2m . A wire
of the same material is connected across its diameter. The total resistance across its diameter AB
will be

4 2
1)  1016  2)  106  3) 0.88  10 6  4) 1.22  106 
3 3

2. Twelve wires of equal length and same cross-section are connected in the form of a cube. If the
resistance of each of the wires is R, then the effective resistance between the two diagonal ends
would be

5
1) 2R 2) 12 R 3) R 4) 8 R
6

3. In the figure shown, the capacity of the condenser C is 2F . The current in 2 resistor is

1 1
1) 9 A 2) 0.9 A 3) A 4) A
9 0.9
151
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4. The figure here shows a portion of a circuit. What are the magnitude and direction of the current i in
the lower right-hand wire

1) 7A 2) 8A 3) 6A 4) 2A

5. A battery is connected to a uniform resistance wire AB and B is earthed. Which one of the graphs
below shows how the current density J varies along AB

1) 2)

3) 4)

152
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

6. In the circuit shown, the value of each resistance is r, then equivalent resistance of circuit between points A and
B will be

1) (4/3) r 2) 3r/2 3) r/3 4) 8r/7

7. A wire of resistance 10 is bent to form a circle. P and Q are points on the circumference of the circle
dividing it into a quadrant and are connected to a Battery of 3 V and internal resistance 1 as shown in the
figure. The currents in the two parts of the circle are

6 18 5 13 4 12 3 9
1) A and A 2) A and A 3) A and A 4) A and A
23 23 26 26 25 25 25 25

8. Two wires of resistance R1 and R2 have temperature coefficient of resistance 1 and  2 , respectively..
These are joined in series. The effective temperature coefficient of resistance is

1   2 1R 1   2 R 2 R1R 2 1 2

1) 2) 1 2 3) R  R 4)
2 1 2 R12  R 22

9. Two cells of equal e.m.f. and of internal resistances r1 and r2 (r1 > r2 ) are connected in series. On connecting
this combination to an external resistance R, it is observed that the potential difference across the first cell
becomes zero. The value of R will be

r1  r2 r1  r2
1) r1 + r2 2) r1 - r2 3) 4)
2 2

153
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

10. In the circuit shown in figure reading of voltmeter is V1 when only S1 is closed, reading of voltmeter is V2 when
only S2 is closed and reading of voltmeter is V3 when both S1 and S2 are closed. Then

1) V3 > V2 > V1 2) V2 > V1 > V3 3) V3 > V1 > V2 4) V1 > V2 > V3

11. In the circuit shown in the figure, if the potential at point A is taken to be zero, the potential at point B
is:

1) -2V 2) +1V 3) -1V 4) +2V

12. The net emf and internal resistance across AB of three batteries as shown in figure is :

1) 2V,1 2) 2V, 2 3) 2V,1.5 40) 4V, 2

154
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

13. A torch bulb rated as 4.5 W, 1.5 V is connected as shown in the figure. The e.m.f. of the cell needed
to make the bulb glow at full intensity is

1) 4.5 V 2) 1.5 V 3) 2.67 V 4) 13.5 V

14. Two bulbs of 500 watt and 200 watt are manufactured to operate on 220 volt line. The ratio of heat produced
in 500 W and 200 W, in two cases, when firstly they are joined in parallel and secondly in series, will be

5 2 5 5 2 5 2 2
1) , 2) , 3) , 4) ,
2 5 2 2 5 2 5 5

15. A battery of internal resistance 4 is connected to the network of resistances as shown in figure. In
order that the maximum power can be delivered to the network, the value of R in  should be

1) 2 2) 3 3) 4 4) 1

16. Two identical batteries, each of e.m.f. 2 volt and internal resistance 1.0 ohm are available to produce heat in
an external resistance R = 0.5 ohm by passing a current through it. The maximum Joulean power that can be
developed across R using these batteries is

8
1) 1.28 watt 2) 2.0 watt 3) watt 4) 3.2 watt
9

155
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17. Four identical electrical lamps are labelled 1.5V, 0.5A which describes the condition necessary for them to
operate at normal brightness. A 12V battery of negligible internal resistance is connected to lamps as shown,
then select the incorrect option.

1) The value of R for normal brightness of each lamp is  3 4  

2) The value of R for normal brightness of each lamp is  21 4  

3) Total power dissipated in circuit when all lamps are normally bright is 24W

4) Power dissipated in R is 21W when all lamps are normally bright

18. If X, Y and Z in figure are identical lamps, which of the following changes to the brightness of the lamps occur
when switch S is closed?

1) X stays the same, Y decreases 2) X-increases, Y-decreases

3) X increases, Y-stays the same 4) X decreases, Y increases

156
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

19. Two electric bulbs rated P1 watt V volts and P2 watt V volts are connected in parallel and V volts are applied
to it. The total power will be

P1P2 P1  P2
1) P1 + P2 watt 2) P1P2 watt 3) P  P watt 4) P P watt
1 2 1 2

20. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter bridge if AC corresponding to null deflection
of galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of the wire AB is doubled

1) x 2) x/4 3) 4x 4) 2x

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. Water boils in an electric kettle in 15 minutes after switching on. If the length of the heating wire is
decreased to 2/3 of its initial value, then the same amount of water will boil with the same supply
voltage in ______ minutes
22. The equivalent resistance between the points P and Q in the network given here is ____ ohm (given
3
r )
2

23. The resistance of the series combination of two resistance is S. When they are joined in parallel the
total resistance is P. If S = nP, then the minimum possible value of n is

157
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

24. A voltmeter of resistance 1000 is connected across a resistance of 500 in the given circuit.
Then the reading of voltmeter is _____ volts

25. The resistive network shown below is connected to a D.C. source of 16 V. The power consumed by
the network is 4 watt. The value of R is _____ ohm

158
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 14
MOVING CHARGES, MAGNETISM & MATTER

SYNOPSIS
Hans Christian Oersted observed that when a compass needle is placed near a straight wire carrying
current, the compass needle aligns so that it is tangent to a circle drawn around the wire. His discovery
provided the first link between electricity and magnetism.
Biot - Savart’s Law
According to this law, the magnetic field due to a current element of length dl carrying a current I at a
point at distance ‘r’ from it is given by
 0 I dlSin
dB =
4 r2

  r

  I dl  rˆ
In vector form dB  0
 dl

4 r2
I
Where,  - the angle between the direction of the current and the line joining the current element to
the point.
 0 - permeability of the free space   0  4107 TA 1m  . The direction of magnetic field is along
 
dl × r .
When  = 0, dB = 0 i.e. the magnetic field along the axis of a current carrying conductor is zero
0 Idl
When  = 900 dB = i.e. magnetic field is maximum in a plane perpendicular to the current
4 r 2
element and passing through its axis.
Comparison of Biot - Savart’s law and Coulomb’s low

Magnetic field is produced by a vector source, the current element Idl . But electrostatic field is
produced by a scalar source, the electric charge.
Both are long range, since both obey inverse square law. The principle of superposition applies to
both fields.
The electrostatic field is along the displacement vector joining the source and the field point. The
magnetic field is perpendicular to the displacement vector
There is an angle dependence in the Biot-Savart law which is not present in the coulomb’s law
1
Permeability  0 and permittivity  0 are related as  0  0 
c2
159
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Magnetic field due to a current carrying conductor

The magnetic field at a point at a perpendicular distance ‘r’ from a straight conductor carrying current I is
given by.

0 I
B sin 1  sin 2 
4r
 
In case of the straight conductor of infinite length  1  2  
 2
 0 2I  0 I 1
B  B 
4  r 2 r r

O r

  0I
At one end of a straight infinite conductor  1  0, 2   B=
 2 4r
Right hand thumb rule : If the linear conductor is grasped in the palm of the right hand with thumb
pointing along the direction of the current, then the curl fingers will point in the direction of lines of
force.
The conventional sign for a magnetic field coming out of the plane normal to it is a dot. ie.
The magnetic field perpendicular to the plane in the downward direction is denoted by 
The magnetic induction at the centre of a square loop of wire of side a carrying a current I is B =
2 2 0 I
a
Magnetic field due to a current carrying circular coil
For a coil of radius a consisting of N turns and carrying current I,
the magnetic field at a point on the axis at a distance d from the centre is :

0 2NIa 2 0 NIa 2  2M
B  ; B = 0 2 2 3/ 2
4 (a  d )
2 2 3/ 2
2(a  d )
2 2 3/ 2
4 (a  d )

160
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Where M = NIA is the magnetic moment of the loop of wire which acts as a magnetic dipole. and
A  a 2 is the area of the coil.
 0 NI
at the centre of the coil B0 =
2a
B0
at d = a, B =
8
The current carrying loop behaves as a small magnetic dipole placed along the axis. One face of the
loop acts as north pole while the other face acts as south pole.
The face in which the current is flowing in clockwise direction behaves as south pole while the face
through which the current is flowing in anticlockwise direction behaves as north pole.

0 I
At the centre of a semi circle B 
4a

 0 I
At the centre of the arc of a circle of angle  , B  ( in radian)
4a

Right hand thumb rule : Curl the fingers of the right hand around the circular wire with the fingers pointing
in the direction of the current, then the thumb gives the direction of the magnetic field.
Ampere’s circuital law states that the line integral of magnetic field around any closed path is equal to
 0 times the current enclosed by the path.
 
    0I enclosed
B.d
This law holds for steady current which do not fluctuate with time.

Field due to a long straight wire of radius ‘a’ carrying steady current I.
0 I I
At a point outside the wire (r > a) B = or B 
2r r
0 I
On the surface of the wire (r = a) B =
2a
 0 Ir
At a point outside the wire (r < a) B = or B  r
2a 2
161
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

B r B 1
e r
ou
sid tsi
in d e
r=a
r

Field due to a solenoid

 0 nI
If a solenoid of n turns per unit length carries a current I, then field B = cos1  cos 2  , where
2
1 and 2 are the angle made by the ends of the solenoid with its axis at the point.
Magnetic field at a point well inside the solenoid, B = 0 nI
0nI B
Field at one end of the solenoid, Bend = 
2 2
A solenoid acts as a magnetic dipole
Direction of magnetic field can be found out by right hand thumb rule
Field due to a toroid
The magnetic field produced in a toroid will be same at all points and at any point it will act along the
tangent to the ring. B =  0 nI
For any point inside the empty space surrounded by the toroid and outside the toroid magnetic field is
zero.
Toroid produces magnetic field without any magnetic poles
Force on a charge ‘q’ in an electric field E is F = qE
qE
The acceleration of the charge is a 
m
  

Force on a charge ‘q’ in a uniform magnetic field B with velocity v is, F  q v  B 
or F = qvB sin 

Then magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity v and the work done by the magnetic force is
zero. Therefore magnetic force cannot change the speed of charged particle even if the field is non-
uniform.
Flemings left hand rule : If the forefinger, central finger and thumb are stretched at right angles to each
other, then central finger represents the direction of current, fore finger represents field and thumb
represents force.
Lorentz Force : The total force experienced by a charge moving inside the electric and magnetic field is
called lorentz force. It is given by
   
F  q E  v  B 
   
Motion of a charge in a magnetic field
The charge does not experience any force, if it is at rest or if it moves along the direction of magnetic
field.

162
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

If velocity and magnetic field are perpendicular, the force on the charge make it to move along a
circular path. If r is the radius of the circular path, then
mv 2
 qvB
r
qBr mv P 2mE
v  or r   
m qB qB qB
Where, P - momentum, E = kinetic energy
If the charge is accelerated through a potential difference V then E = qV

2mqV
r 
qB
2r 2m
Time period of revolution T = 
v qB

Time period is independent of velocity and radius of the path

 
If v and B makes an angle ‘  ’, then due to the perpendicular component of velocity v sin  the

mv sin 
charge moves along a circular path of radius, r = . The parallel component of velocity v cos 
qB
makes the charge to moves along the direction of the magnetic field. Then the charge moves along
2 mv cos
a helical path. The pitch of the helix is, pitch =
qB

v sin 

Pitch


B
v
vcos 
Velocity selector
If the electric field, magnetic field and velocity of the particle are mutually perpendicular as shown in
figure.
 
ˆ F = q v×B   qvBjˆ
FE = qEj, B

total force F = q(E - vB) ˆj

163
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

FE E

x
v
B
FB
Z
E
If the total force on the charge is zero then qE = qvB or v = .
B
E
Therefore only particles with speed pass undeflected through the region of crossed fields. This
B
method was used by J.J. Thomson to measure (e/m) of an electron.

Cyclotron: - It is a particle accelerator. It is based on the principle that the positive ions can be
accelerated to high energies with a comparatively smaller alternating potential differences by making
them to cross the electric field again and again, by making use of strong magnetic field. The frequency
of the applied electric field is equal to the frequency of revolution of positive ion and this frequency is
called cyclotron frequency. It is given by
qB

2m
q 2 B2 R 2
The maximum energy attained by the particle is Emax =
2m
Where R - radiuus of the dees
Emax = 2n (qV), where n - number of revolution completed by the ions before leaving the dees.
Frequency of revolution is independent of the energy of the charged particle
Limitations : Electrons cannot be accelerated to very high velocities - Cannot accelerate uncharged
particles.
Magnetic force on a current carrying conductor
A conductor of length ‘l’ carrying current I placed in a uniform magnetic field B experiences a force
  
 
F  I   B or F  IB sin 
Thus force is perpendicular to both the field and the conductor. Force is maximum, when the magnetic
field acts at right angles to the length of the conductor and the force is zero, when the length of the
conductor is parallel to the magnetic field.
Force between two infinitely long parallel current carrying conductors
Force per unit length of the conductor is
 0 2I1I 2
F= where I1 and I2 are the currents through the conductors and r is the separation between
4 r
conductors.
The force is attractive, if currents are in the same direction and repulsive if currents are in opposite
directions.

164
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

When a coil of area A having N turns and carrying current I, is suspended in a magnetic field of
strength B then the torque acts on the coil is
 = NIAB sin  = MB sin 
Where M = NIA - magnetic moment of the coil.

 - angle between the direction of B and normal to the plane of the coil.
  
In vector form   M  B

If B makes an angle  with the plane of the coil   NIABcos   MB cos 

Moving coil galvanometer : It is a device used to measure small electric currents. A current carrying loop
or coil experience a torque in a uniform magnetic field. This is the principle of moving coil galvanometer.
The radial field is perpendicular to the plane of the coil. Thus torque acts on the coil is  = NIAB

If  is the angle of rotation of the coil, the restoring torque   k where k - tortional constant of the
spring. In equilibrium k  = NIAB

NAB k
or  = I or I =   G
k NAB

k
Where G =  galvanometer constant
NAB

 NAB
Current sensitivity :  (rad A 1 )
I k

 NAB
Voltage sensitivity  (rad V 1 ) , Where R - Resistance of the coil.
V kR
Ammeter :
A Galvanometer of resistance G can be converted into an ammeter of range I, by connecting a small
suitable resistance S called shunt parallel to the galvanometer, which is given by

IgG
S
I  Ig

Since Ig G = (I - Ig)S
Where, Ig - current through galvanometer

GS
Resistance of the ammeter is RA =
G S
Ammeter is a low resistance device and always connected in series to the circuit.

165
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Voltmeter : A Galvanometer can be converted into a voltmeter read up to V by connecting a suitable large
V
resistance ‘R’ in series to the galvanometer and R = I  G
g

Resistance of voltmeter RV = R + G

It is a high resistance device and always connected in parallel to the circuit.

Magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron

Let T be the time period of revolution, r be the orbital radius of the electron and v the orbital speed,
then

2r e ev
T= and current I = 
v T 2 r

evr
The orbital magnetic moment    IA  Ir 
2

e e
or    IA  mvr  L , L = mvr, angular momentum of the electron
2m 2m

 e
 is called gyromagnetic ratio
L 2m

nh
According to Bobr hypothesis L = , n  1, 2, 3..........
2

enh
 L 
4m

eh
Its minimum value is    min   9.27 1024 Am 2 and is called the Bohr magneton.
4m

Electron has an intrinsic magnetic moment due to the spin motion of the electron and is known as
e
spin magnetic moment  S  S, Where S - spin angular momentum
2m
166
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I
1. A charged particle of charge 5mc and mass 5gm is moving with a constant speed 5 m/s. In a uniform
magnetic field on a curve x 2  y 2  25 . Where x and y are in meter. The value of magnetic field
reuired will be

1) 0.5 Tesla 2) 1 T along z-axis

3) 5 kT along the x-axis 4) 1 KJ along any line in the x-y plane

2. A particle of mass m and charge q, moving with velocity V enters Region II normal to the boundary as
shown in figure. Region II has a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the paper. The
length of the Region II is l. Then

ql B
1) The particle eneters Region III only if its velocity V 
m

ql B
2) Path length of the partilce in region II is maximum when velocity V 
m

3) Time spent in Region II is same for any velocity V as long as the particle returns to Region I.

4) All the above are correct.

3. An electron travelling with a speed u along the positive x-axis enters into a region of magnetic field
where B   B 0 k  x  0  . It comes out of the region with speed v then

1) v = u at y >0 2) v = u at y < 0 3) v > u at y>0 4) v > u at y < 0

167
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4. Two long parallel wires carry currents i1 and i2 such that i1 > i2. When the currents are in the same
direction the magnetic field at a point midway between the wires is 6  10 6 T . If the direction of i2 is
reversed, the field becomes 3  10 5 T . The ratio i1 / i2 is
1) 1/2 2) 2 3) 2/3 4) 3/2
5. A metallic wire bent to form a hexagon of side ‘a’ carries a current I. The magnitude of the magnetic
field at the centre of the hexagon is:

 0 3I 0 4 3 I
1) 2)
4 4a 4 a

 0 3I 0 2 3I
3) 4)
4 2a 4 a
6. The magnetic induction at O due to a current in conductor shaped as shown in figure is

 0i  3 2 0i  3 2 0i  3 1   0i  1 1 
        
2b 
1) 2) 3) 4)
4  2a b  4  4a b  2  4a 4  a b 
7. A long straight wire along the x-axis carries a current i in the negative z direction. The magnetic vector

field B at a point having coordinates (x,y) in the z= 0 plane is


 0 yiˆ  xjˆ  
 0 I xiˆ  yjˆ  
 0 I xjˆ  yiˆ  
 0 I xiˆ  yjˆ 
2  x  y  2  x  y  2  x  y  2  x  y 
1) 2 2 2) 2 2 3) 2 2 4) 2 2

8. A long, straight wire of radius a carries a current distributed uniformly over its cross-section. The ratio
a
of the magnetic fields due to the wire at distance and 2a, respectively from the axis of the wire is
2

2 1
1) 2) 1 3) 4) 2
3 2

168
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

9. Two wires A and B are carrying currents I1 and I2 as shown in the figure. The separation between
them is d. A third wire C carrying a current I is to be kept parallel to them at a distance x from A such
that the net force acting on it zero. The possible values of x are:

 I  I2 I1d1 Id
1) x    d and x  d 2) x  and x  2
 I1  I 2   I1  I2  I2  I1 I1  I2

 I1  I2  I2   I2 
3) x    d and x  d 4) x    d and x   d
 I1  I 2   I1  I2   I1  I 2   I1  I 2 
10. A wire of length L is shaped into a circle and then bent in such a way that the two semi-circles are
perpendicular. The magnetic moment of the system when current I flows through the system is

2iL2 3iL2 iL2 iL2

1) 2) 3) 4)
8 4 4 2
11. A circular coil of 100 turns and effective diameter 20 cm carries a current of 0.5A. It is to be turned in
a magnetic field of B = 2.0 T from a position in which the normal to the plane of the coil makes an
angle  equals to zero to 1800. The work required in this process is
1)  J 2) 2  J 3) 4  J 4) 8  J

12. A circular loop of radius 20cm is placed in a uniform magnetic field B  2T in X-Y plane, the loop
carries a current 1A in the direction shown in figure. The magnitude of torque acting on the loop is
nearly

0.25 0.75
1) 0.25 N-m 2) Nm 3) 0.75 N-m 4) Nm
2 2
169
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

13. PQ is a uniform rod of length  and mass m carrying current i and is suspended in unifiorm magnetic

field of induction B acting inward as shown in figure. The tension in each string is

mg  Bi mg  Bi
1) mg  Bi 2) mg  Bi 3) 4)
2 2
14. A thin wire of length L is made of an insulating material. The wire is bent to form a circular loop, and a
positive charge q is distributed uniformly around the circumference of the loop. The loop is then set
into rotation with angular speed  around an axis through its centre. If the loop is in the region where

there is a uniform magnetic field B directed parallel to the plane of the loop, calculate the magnitude
of the magnetic torque on the loop.

qωL2 B qωL2 B qωL2 B qωL2 B

1) 2) 3) 4)
8π 2 4π 2 2π 2 π2
15. A galvanometer of resistance 5 is connected in series with a resistance of 0.2 to a battery of
negligible internal resistance. The deflection is noted. If the 0.2 resistance is replaced by 2
resistance, the value of shunt resistance to be connected to the galvanometer to maintain the same
deflection is
1) 1 2) 8.9 3) 0.01 4) 10
16. A galvanometer 30 divisions and a sensitivity of 16A per division. It can be converted into a voltmeter
to read 3V by connecting a resistance (approximately)
1) 6k in series 2) 66k in parallel 3) 66k in series 4) 6k in parallel
17. Two similar bar magnets P and Q, each of magnetic moment M, are taken. If P is cut along its axial
line and Q is cut along its equatorial line, all the four pieces obtained have
M
1) equal pole strength 2) magnetic moment
4
M
3) magnetic moment 4) magnetic moment m
2
18. The effective length of a magnet os 31.4 cm and its pole strength is 0.5Am. The magnetic moment,
if it is bent in the form of a semi circle will be
1) 0.1 Am2 2) 0.01 Am2 3) 0.2 Am2 4) 1.2 Am2

170
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

19. Two small identical bar magnets each of magnetic dipole moment M are placed as shown in the
figure. Magnetic field in a distant point P is

0 2M  0 2 2M 0 M 0 M
1) , 2) 3) 4) .
4 r 3 4 r 3 4 r 3  r3
20. The small magnets each of magnetic moment 10 Am2 are placed end on position 0.1m apart from
the centres. The force acting between them is:
1) 0.6  10 7 N 2) 0.06  10 7 N 3) 0.6 N 4) 0.06 N
21. A bar magnet having a magnetic moment of 2  10 4 Am 2 is free to rotate in a horizontal plane. A
horizontal magnetic filed is B  6  10 4 T exists in the space. The workdone in taking the magnet
slowly from a direction parallel to the field to a direction 600 from the field is:
1) 2J 2) 0.6J 3) 12J 4) 6J
22. A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 0.32 J/T is placed in uniform field of 0.15T. If the magnetic is
free to rotate in the plane of the field. The P.E. of the magnet in stable equilibrium position.
1) 4.8  10 2 J 2) 2.4  10 2 J 3) 4.8  10 2 J 4) 2.4  10 2 J .
23. Figure shows a small magnetised needle ‘A’ placed at a point ‘O’. The arrow shows the direction of its
magnetic moment. The other arrows show different positions and orientations of the magnetic moment
of another identical magnetised needle is:

Which configuration corresponds to the highest potential energy among all the configurations shown

1) AB6 2) AB1 3) AB4 4) AB2

171
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

24. Find the magnitude of the potential at a point situated on a line passing through the middle point of a
short magnet 0.3 Am2 at an angle of 600 with its axis at a distance of 0.05 metre from the midpoint of
the magnet.

1) 3 103 2) 6  106 3) 9 109 4) 12  1012

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

25. A charged particle moves in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to it, with a radius of curvature
4cm. On passing through a metallic sheet it loses half of its kinetic energy. Then, the radius of curvature
of the particle is 2 x find x value.

26. A current carrying ring has a moment of inertia 400 10 2 kg m 2 about an axis passing through its
centre and perpendicular to its plane. The centre of the ring is at the origin. The ring has magnetic

 
moment m  3iˆ  4ˆjAm 2 . A magnetic field B  4iˆ  3jˆ T is switched on at t = 0. Find the maximum
angular velocity of the ring (in rad/s)

27. A metal ring of radius r = 0.5m with its plane normal to a uniform magnetic field B of induction 0.2T
carries a current I = 100A. The tension in newton developed in the ring is

28. A long horizontal wire AB, which is free to move in avertical plane and carries a steady current of 20A,
is in equilibrium at a height of 0.01m over another parallel long wire CD which is fixed in a horizontal
plane and carries a steady current of 30A, as shown. The time period of small oscillations of the
x
conductor AB, when it is slightly depressed and released, is , then x is
10

29. Two identical bar magnets with length 10cm and weight 50gm are arranged vertically and with their
like poles facing. The upper magnet hangs in the air above the lower one so that the distance between
nearest poles of magnet is 3mm. Moment of each magnet in Am2 is:

30. The distance of two points on the axis of a magnet from its center is 10cm and 20cm respectively.
The ratio of magnetic intensity at these points is 12.5:1. The length of the magnet will be

172
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 15
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
AND ALTERNATING CURRENT
SYNOPSIS
Electromagnetic Induction
   
Magnetic flux -The flux through an area A in a uniform magnetic field B is   B.A  BA cos 
 
 is the angle between Band A
Electromagnetic induction - If the magnetic flux through an area enclosed by a closed conducting loop
changes with time, an e.m.f. is produced in the loop.
d
Faraday’s law - The magnitude of induced e.m.f. is equal to the rate of change of magnetic flux. |  |
dt
Lenz’s law - (conservation of energy)
The direction of induced current is such as to oppose the change in magnetic flux that produces it.
d

dt
Motional e.m.f. - If a conducting rod of length l moves with velocity v in a magnetic field B, e.m.f .induced
between the ends of the rod - Bvl
B, v and l are perpendicular to each other. If these quantities are not perpendicular, their perpendicular
components must be used.
Induced e.m.f due to rotation
1. e.m.f induced in a conducting rod of length l rotating with angular velocity  about its one end in a
1
uniform perpendicular magnetic field :- Bl
2

2
2. e.m.f induced between the centre and the edge of a disc of radius r, rotating in a perpendicular magnetic
1
field :- Br 2
2
Self induction - Induction of e.m.f in a coil due to its own current change.
The flux linkage N  I  N  LI
L - co-efficient of self induction or self inductance
L - Electromagnetic analogue of mass in mechanics

d dI
 (N)  L
dt dt

173
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

dI
VA  L  VB
dt
L of solenoid L  0 n 2 Al

L r   r L. Lr - self inductance with a core of relative permeability  r .

1 2
Magnetic energy U B  LI
2

2
Magnetic energy density = 2
0

Mutual induction - Induction of e.m.f. in a coil due to change in current in a neighbouring coil.
Flux linkage with the neighbouring coil N   I
N  M I
M - coefficient of mutual induction or mutual inductance.
d dI
 (N)  M
dt dt
Mutual inductance of a pair of co-axial solenoid of same length l, M =  0 n1n 2 Al.
A - Area of cross section of inner solenoid.
L.C. oscillations - If a charged capacitor is connected across an inductance, the charge and current
1
oscillates simple harmonically with a frequency f 
2 LC
Eddy currents - When the magnetic flux linked with a bulk piece of conducting material is varied, in-
duced currents are produced. The flow pattern of this current resembles swirling eddies.

ALTERNATING CURRENT
A conducting loop is rotated in a uniform magnetic field with uniform angular velocity  , a sinusoidal
voltage is induced in the loop. v = NAB  sin  t = v0 sin  t

v0 = NBA  - peak value of voltage.

v0
If R is the resistance of the loop, current in the loop i = sin t  i0 sin t.
R
i0 - peak value of current.
2i0
Average value of current over a half cycle  i  1 cycle  
2

2v0 i0 v0
 v 1  i r.m.s  i2  v r.m.s 
2
cycle  onecycle
2 2
Phasors - The phase relationship between current and voltage in an a.c. circuit can be shown conve-
niently by representing voltage and current by rotating vectors called phasors.

174
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Purely resistive circuit :

v0
i sin t  i 0 sin t
R

The current is in phase with applied voltage

Purely inductive circuit :

i  i 0 sin  t   / 2 

v0
i0  . XL  L  inductive reac tan ce
XL

The current lags the applied voltage by  / 2

Purely capacitive circuit :-
175
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

i  i 0 sin  t   / 2 

v0 1
i0  , XC  
XC c capacitive reactance.

Current leads the applied voltage by  / 2

Series LCR circuit :-

   
The phasor relationship between the voltage is V  VR  VL  VC

V0
i  i0 sin(t  ). i0 
Z

Z  R 2   L  1 / C - impedance
2

tan  
 L  1 / C . cos  
R
R Z
Resonance in series LCR circuit :-
As  increases XL increases and XC decreases.

1
At  =  0, XL = XC ie L0  C
0

The impedance of the circuit is minimum (Z = R) and current is maximum. This is called resonance.

176
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

1
Resonant frequency f 0 
2 LC

Band width = 2

0 L 1 L
Quality factor = Q   0 
2 R R C
Power in a.c. circuit :-
Instantaneous power P = v  i  v0 sin t i 0 sin  t   

v 0i 0
Average power over one cycle  P  cos 
2
v0 i0
=  cos   VI cos   I2 Zcos 
2 2
cos - power factor
Resistive circuit   0  P  VI
Purely inductive or capacitive circuit    / 2  P  0
since <P> = 0, the current in a purely inductive or capacitive circuit is called wattles current.
Transformer : - Works on the principle of mutual induction.
VS IP NS
 
VP IS NP (Ideal transformer - Efficiency = 1)

VS IS
Efficiency = V I
P P

177
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

SECTION - I

1. A circular loop of area 3m2 and resistance 3  is lying in y-z plane. The magnetic induction at the

 
location of the loop varies with time t as B   2t  6t ˆi  3t ˆj  T . The magnitude of maximum
3 2

current in the loop during the interval from t = 0 to t = 2 s is

1) 3.5 A 2) 12 A 3) 4 A 4) 6 A
2. A circular coil of area 200 cm2 and 1000 turns having resistance 5 is placed in a uniform magnetic
field 1T. Initially the coil is placed with its plane perpendicular to the field. Now the coil is rotated about
an axis at a constant rate of 2 rad/s such that the flux associated with it varies
i) The instantaneous emf induced in it when the plane of the loop makes an angle 60o with the field is
20V
ii) If the coil is rotated through an angle of 180o in 0.2 s, the average emf induced will be 200V
1) only (i) is correct 2) only (ii) is correct 3) both are correct 4) both are incorrect

3. As shown in the figure, P and Q are two coaxial conducting loops separated by some distance. When the
switch S is closed, a clockwise current I P flows in P (as seen by E) and an induced current I Q1 flows in Q.
The switch remains closed for a long time. When S is opened, a current I Q2 flows in Q. Then the directions
of I Q1 and I Q2 (as seen by E) are

(1) Respectively clockwise and anticlockwise

(2) Both clockwise
(3) Both anticlockwise
(4) Respectively anticlockwise and clockwise

4. A conducting wire frame is placed in a magnetic field which is directed into the paper. The
magnetic field is increasing at a constant rate. The directions of induced current in wires AB and
CD are

(1) B to A and D to C (2) A to B and C to D

(3) A to B and D to C (4) B to A and C to D

178
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

5. Plane figures made of thin wires of resistance R = 50 milli ohm/metre are located in a uniform magnetic field
perpendicular into the plane of the figures and which decrease at the rate dB/dt = 0.1 m T/s. Then currents in
the inner and outer boundary are. (The inner radius a = 10 cm and outer radius b = 20 cm)

(1) 10– 4 A (Clockwise), 2  10– 4 A (Clockwise)

(2) 10– 4 A (Anticlockwise), 2  10– 4 A (Clockwise)
(3) 2  10– 4 A (clockwise), 10– 4 A (Anticlockwise)
(4) 2  10– 4 A (Anticlockwise), 10– 4 A (Anticlockwise)

6. Two parallel conducting rails with negligible resistance are 10cm apart. The circuit contains two
metal rails AB and CD with resistance 2 each along the rails. A uniform magnetic field 0.01T is
applied perpendicular to the plane of the rails. If AB and CD move with uniform speed 4m/s and 2m/
s away from each other, the induced current in the circuit is:

1) 0.5mA 2) 1.5mA 3) 1mA 4) 2mA


7. A conducting rod AC of length 4l is rotated about a point O in a uniform magnetic field B directed into the
paper. AO = l and OC = 3l. Then

Bl 2 7 9
(1) VA  VO  (2) VO  VC  Bl 2 (3) VA  VC  4 Bl 2 (4) VC  VO  Bl 2
2 2 2

179
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. A square frame with side a as shown in figure is moved with uniform velocity v from an infinitely long
straight wire carrying current I. The emf induced in the frame as a function of distance x

0Ia2 v 0Iaxv 0Ia 2 v

1) 2) 2 x(x  a) 3) 4) zero
2 x(x  a) 4 x(x  a)

9. A conducting rod PQ of length L = 1.0 m is moving with a uniform speed v = 2 m/s in a uniform
magnetic field B  4.0 T directed into the paper. A capacitor of capacity C = 10 F is connected as
shown in figure. Then

(1) qA = + 80 C and qB = – 80 C
(2) qA = – 80 C and qB = + 80 C
(3) qA = 0 = qB
(4) Charge stored in the capacitor increases exponentially with time

10. A wire cd of length l and mass m is sliding without friction on conducting rails ax and by as shown. The vertical
rails are connected to each other with a resistance R between a and b. A uniform magnetic field B is applied
perpendicular to the plane abcd such that cd moves with a constant velocity of

mgR mgR mgR mgR

(1) (2) (3) (4)
B B 22 B33 B 2

180
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

11. A simple pendulum with bob of mass m and conducting wire of length L swings under gravity through an
angle 2 . The earth’s magnetic field component in the direction perpendicular to swing is B. Maximum
potential difference induced across the pendulum is

   
(1) 2 BL sin   ( gL)1/ 2 (2) BL sin   ( gL)
2 2
   
(3) BL sin   ( gL)3 / 2 (4) BL sin   ( gL ) 2
2 2

12. A uniform but time-varying magnetic field B(t) exists in a circular region of radius a and is directed into
the plane of the paper, as shown. The magnitude of the induced electric field at point P at a distance r
from the centre of the circular region

1 1
(1) Is zero (2) Decreases as (3) Increases as r (4) Decreases as
r r2

13. An ideal inductance 0.2 H is connected as shown in figure. The current from the cell at the instant of
closing key and long time after closing key K

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1) A and A 2) A and A 3) A and A 4) A and A
10 6 5 3 10 5 5 6

181
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

14. Figure shows an inductor L and a resistance R connected in parallel to a battery through a switch.
The resistance of R is the same as that of the coil that makes L. Two identical bulbs are put in each
arm of the circuit.

Consider the following statements.

(i) The bulb B2 lights up earlier when S is closed.
(ii) After some time both B1 and B2 become equally bright.
1) only (i) is correct 2) only (ii) is correct
3) both (i) and (ii) are correct 4) both are incorrect

15. An e.m.f. of 15 volt is applied in a circuit containing 5 henry inductance and 10 ohm resistance.
The ratio of the currents at time t   and at t = 1 second is
e1/ 2 e2
(1) (2) (3) 1  e1 (4) e1
e1/ 2  1 e2  1

16. A small square loop of wire of side l is placed inside a large square loop of wire of side L (L > l).
The loop are coplanar and their centre coincide. The mutual inductance of the system is
proportional to
(1) l / L (2)  2 / L (3) L /  (4) L2 / 

17. Statement I: Work done to move a charge once around a closed loop in an induced electric field is
non zero
Statement II: Line integral of induced electric field over a closed loop is non zero
1) Statement I and statement II are correct
2) Statement I and statement II are incorrect
3) Statement I is correct and statement II is incorrect
4) Statement I is incorrect and statement II is correct

182
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

18. In the series LCR circuit , the voltmeter reading V and ammeter reading I are

1) V = 100V, I =2A 2) V = 100V, I = 5A

3) V = 400V, I =2A 4) V = 300V, I = 1A

19. 
In the circuit shown, phase difference between i1 and i2 is Take X L  3 R 

1) 150° 2) 120° 3) 90° 4) 135°

20. In the circuit shown in figure neglecting source resistance the voltmeter and ammeter reading will respectively,
will be

1) 0V, 3A 2) 150V, 3A 3) 150V, 6A 4) 0V, 8A

SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. A copper rod of length 0.19m is moving with uniform velocity 10m/s parallel to a long straight wire
carrying current of 5A. The rod itself is perpendicular to the wire with its ends at distance 0.01m and
0.2m from it. If the induced emf in the rod is 5N V , the value of N is

183
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

22. A square loop of side 2m and resistance 2.5 is placed in a time varying magnetic field

B   5t  2  T

The current in loop in ampere is

12
23. The ratio of time constants of the circuit during growth of current and decay of current is . Find K
K

24. In the circuit shown, charge q varies with time t as q  t 3  t 2  4t , where q is in coulombs and time
t is in second. Find potential difference VA  VB at time t = 1s

25. An LCR series circuit with a resistance of 100 ohm is connected to an ac source of 200 V (r.m.s.) and angular
frequency 300 rad/s. When only the capacitor is removed, the current lags behind the voltage by 60o . When
only the inductor is removed the current leads the voltage by 60o . The average power dissipated
is______________ watts

184
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTR - 16
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

SYNOPSIS
Core syllabus for NEET
1) Need for displacement current
2) EM Waves and their characteristics (qualitative ideas only). Transverse nature of EM waves.
3) EM spectrum (Radiowaves, microwaves, infrared, visible, u-v-rays, X-rays, Gamma rays) including
elementary facts about their uses.
Teaching Points
Displacement current (ID) - Changing electric field and changing magnetic field in a capacitor -
Equations - Relation between displacement current and conduction current - Maxwell’s equations.
Propagation of EM waves - Transverse nature, Equations and properties.
Equations for magnetic field, velocity of EM waves propagation constant. Average energy density in
electric and magnetic field - RMs values. Total energy density. Poynting vector - Momentum, Pressure
and Intensity of EM waves.
Electromagnetic spectrum - Radio waves, Micro waves, Infrared rays, Visible light, U-V rays, Gamma
rays. Brief description including the production, frequency range, wavelength range and uses of each
category of the spectrum.
SYNOPSIS
Displacement current (ID)
Maxwell developed the theory of EM waves by introducing the idea of the displacement current.
Consider the working of a capacitor.

According to Faradays Law of electromagnetic induction, a changing magnetic field induces a current.
Maxwell said that the converse of this, is also true. A changing electric field induces a changing
magnetic field, which in turn induces an e.m.f and hence the displacement current.

185
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

d
I D 0  E  (Given by Maxwell)
dt
d
0  EA 
dt
d
0 A E
dt

d V
0 A  
dt  d 

0 A d dV
 V  C
d dt dt
The time varying electric field between the plates of a capacitor, is directed perpendicular to the plane
of the capacitor plates and the time varying magnetic field (produced by the electric field), is along the
perimeter of a circle, in a plane, parallel to the plates of the capacitor. Thus the time varying electric
field and the magnetic field are perpendicular to each other. The two fields combine to constitute EM
waves, which propagates in a direction perpendicular to the directions of both the fields. The value of
ID is numerically equal to the conduction current IC. Inside the capacitor, IC = 0 and i = ID. Outside the
capacitor ID = 0 and i = IC.
Hertz produced EM waves in the laboratory. J.C. Bose transmitted EM waves through short distances.
Marconi transmitted EM waves through long distances.
Propagation of EM waves
EM waves can be produced in the laboratory, due to accelerated charges. EM waves propagate
through space as coupled electric and magnetic fields, oscillating perpendicular to each other and to
the direction of propagation of the waves.

EM waves are transverse progressive waves and the equation may be written as

E x  E 0 sin  kz  t 

By  B0 sin  kz  t 

2
where k 

186
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

 
The direction of EM wave is along E  B . The direction may be along any axis x, y, or z. EM waves do
not require a medium for the propagation. The variation of E and B have the same frequency and in
phase. At any instant, the ratio of the amplitudes of electric and magnetic fields, is a constant and is
 E0 
equal to the velocity of EM waves.   c
 B0 
EM waves are governed by Maxwell’s Equations.
  1
1)  E.ds  
S 0
q (Gauss’ Law in Electrostatics)

 
2) 
 B.ds  0 (Gauss’ Law in Magnetism)
s

  d
3) 
c l  dt  B  (Faraday’s Law of electromagnetic induction)
E.d

   d 
4) 
c l  0  I  ID   0  I 0 dt  E   (Ampere-Maxwell Law)
B.d

Magnetic field (B) on a circular loop of wire of radius r, kept between the capacitor plates of radius R,
is given by

0ID r
B
2R 2

0 ID
Bmax   r  R 
2R
Velocity of EM waves in free space

1 1
C   3  108 m / s
 0 0 7
4 10  8.85 10 12

Velocity of EM waves in a medium

1 1 1 1 c c
V     
  0 r 0r  0 0  r r  r r n

where  r r  n  refractive index of the medium.

Propagation constant (Angular wave number)

2 2 2 
K   
 c c c



c where c = velocity of EM radiations
K
187
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Average energy density in the electric field

1 1 1
UE  0 E 02  0 2E 2rms  0 E rms
2

4 4 2

 E0 
 E rms  2 
 
Average energy density in the magnetic field

1 B02 1 1 2
UB   2
2Brms  Brms
4  0 4 0 2 0

 B0 
 Brms  2 
 
To show that UE = UB

1 1 1
0 E 02  0  B0 c   0 B02 c 2
2
UE 
4 4 4
1 1 1 2
 0 B02   B0  U B
4  0 0 4 0

Total average energy density of an EM wave (U)

1 1
U av  U  2U E  2  0 E 02  0 E 20 0 E 2rms
4 2
or

1 2 1 2 B2rms
U av  U  2U B  2  B0  B0 
4 0 2 0 0

Poynting vector S 
The energy transported by EM waves per second per unit area, is represented by a quantity called the
Poynting vector.
 

It is denoted by S  E  B
0
1
Magnitude of S  EB
0

1 E 1 E2
S E. 
0 c 0 c

1 1 2
S BcB  B c
0 0
188
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

U
Momentum of EM wave P 
c
U
Momentum delivered by an EM wave to a perfectly absorbing surface P 
c
2U
Momentum delivered by an EM wave to a perfectly reflecting surface  P  (P)  2P 
c
Intensity of radiation
1
I 0 E 02 c
2
1 2
I B0 c
2 0
1) I  Uc

P
2) I 
4d 2
where P = power of source
d = distance of the point
S
3) I 
2
where S = poynting vector
Radiation pressure (  )

S
Absorbing surface  
c
2S
Reflecting surface  
c
Electromagnetic spectrum
The orderly distribution of EM radiations, according to their wave length or frequency, is called the
electromagnetic spectrum

 -rays, X-rays, u-v-rays, Visible light, IR rays, Microwaves, Radio waves.

 -rays
Wave length range : 1 × 10–14m  1 × 10–10 m
Frequency range : 3 × 1022 Hz  3 × 1018 Hz

189
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

They are highly energetic radiations and are emitted by radioactive nuclei. They are detected by
photographic plate and ionisation chamber. They are neutral and highly penetrating. They can be
used to destroy cancer cells.
X-rays
Wave length range : 1 × 10–11 m  3 × 10–8 m
Frequency range : 3 × 1019 Hz  1 × 1016 Hz
They are produced by coolidge X-ray tube. They possess penetrating power and used for diagnosis of
deceases.
u-v rays
Wave length range : 1 × 10–8 m  4 × 10–7 m
Frequency range : 3 × 1016 Hz  8 × 1014 Hz
They are part of solar spectrum, they can also be produced by arcs of mercury and iron. They can be
detected by photocells and photographic film. u-v rays can produce vitamin D in the skin, but produce
extra menalin, tanning the skin. u-v rays can be used for purifying water and also for LASIK (Laser
Assisted In Situ Keratomileusis) eye surgery. Ozone layer and also ordinary glass, reduces the intensity
of u-v rays.
Visible light (VIBGYOR)
Wave length range : 4 × 10–7 m  8 × 10–7 m
Frequency range : 8 × 1014 Hz  4 × 1014 Hz
They are emitted due to atomic excitation Human eye is sensitive, only to visible part of EM spectrum.
Infrared rays
Wave length range : 8 × 10–7 m  5 × 10–3 m
Frequency range : 4 × 1014 Hz  6 × 10111 Hz
IR rays are heat radiations and therefore all hot bodies including the sun are sources of IR rays. They
are detected by thermopiles. IR rays are responsible for “Greanhouse effect”.
Microwaves (Short Radio Waves)
Wave length range : 1 × 10–3 m  1 × 10–1 m
Frequency range : 3 × 1011 Hz  1 × 109 Hz
Microwaves are produced by oscillating electronic circuits. (Klystron valve, Magnetron valve etc) They
are used in RADAR and also in ovens.
Radiowaves
Wave length range : 1 × 10–1 m  1 × 104 m
Frequency range : 3 × 109 Hz  3 × 104 Hz
They are produced by oscillating electronic circuits. Radiowaves are used as carrier waves in radio
broadcasting and television transmission.

190
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. Displacement current is
1) continuous when electric field is changing in the circuit
2) continuous when magnetic field is changing in the circuit
3) continuous in both types of fields
4) continuous through wires and resistance only
2. Maxwell’s modified form of Ampere’s circuital law is
   
1) 
s
B.ds  0 2) 
s
B.ds  0 I

    d
3)    0 I
l
B.d 4) l    0 I   00 dtE
B.d

3. Which of the following has zero average value in a plane E.M. wave ?
1) Kinetic energy 2) Magnetic field 3) Electric field 4) Both 2 and 3
4. Speed of E.M. waves through a medium depends upon
1) only electric properties of the medium
2) only magnetic properties of the medium
3) mechanical and thermal properties of medium
4) both electric and magnetic properties of the medium
5. Consider an electromagnetic wave that propagates in the Z direction with an electric field strength of
1 v/m pointing in the Y direction. Then the direction and magnitude of magnetic field pulse that travels
along with electric field is :
1) 3.33 × 10-9 T in y direction 2) 3.33 × 10-9 T in z direction
3) 3.33 × 10-9 T in –ve direction 4) 6.66 × 10-9 T in x direction
6. A plane EM wave is incident on a material surface. If the wave delivers momentum P and energy E,
then

1) P = 0, E = 0 2) P  0, E  0 3) P  0, E  0 4) P  0, E  0

7. In an em wave, the amplitude of electric field is 1 V/m. The frequency of wave is 5 x 1014 Hz and is
moving along z-axis. What is the average energy density of electric field?
1) 4.4 x 10–12 2) 6.6 x 10–12 3) 2.2 x 10–12 4) 8.8 x 10–12
8. The total average energy density of e.m waves whose electric field variation is given by
E = (50 N/c) sin (  t - kx) will be nearly
1) 10-8 J/m3 2) 10-6 J/m3 3) 10-10 J/m3 4) 10-12 J/m3
9. The electric part of a plane electromagnetic wave varies with time of amplitude 2v/m propagating
along z-axis. The average energy density is (in Jm–3)
1) 13.29×10–12 2) 8.86×10–12 3) 17.172×10–12 4) 4.43×10–12

191
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

10. About 5% of the power of a 100 W bulb is converted to visible radiation. The average intensity of the
visible radiation at a distance of 10m from the bulb is
1) 0.4 W/m2 2) 4 × 10–5 W/m2 3) 4 × 10–3 W/m2 4) 5 × 10–1 W/m2
11. A radar sends the waves towards a distant object and receives the signal reflected by the object.
These waves are
1) sound waves 2) X-rays 3) microwaves 4) Radiowaves
12. Green house effect is due to
1) UV radiations 2) infrared radiations

3)  -rays 4) X-rays
13. Given below are two statements: In the light of the statements choose the correct option
Statement-I : Microwaves are better carrier of signals than optical waves
Statement-II : Microwaves and optical waves move with the same speed
1) Statement-I and Statement-II are true and Statement-II is the correct explanation of Statement-I.
2) Statement-I and Statement-II are true and Statement-II is not the correct explanation of Statement I
3) Statement-I is false but Statement-II is true.
4) Both Statement-I and Statement-II are false.
14. Assertion : If the earth did not have an atmosphere, the day will be warmer and the night will be cooler.
Reason : The earth’s atmosphere produce green-house effect.
1) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.
2) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
4) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
15. Which of the following is not transported by the EM wave ?
1) Energy 2) Information 3) Charge 4) Momentum
16. An EM wave enters a medium from air. The electric fields are

  z 
E1  E 01xˆ cos  2   t   in air
 c 

E 2  E 02 xˆ cos  k  2z  ct   in medium

where the wave number k and frequency  refer to their values in air. The medium is non-magnetic,
if  r1 and  r2 refer to relative permittivities of air and medium respectively. Which of the following
options is correct?

 r1 1  r1  r1  r1 1
1)   2)  4 3)  2 4)   4
r2 2 r2 r2 r2

192
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

17.
3
 6 14

Given the wave function ( in SI unit ) for a wave to be   x.t   10 sin  3  10 x  9  10 t . The speed
of wave is

1) 9  1014 ms 1 2) 3 108 ms 1 3) 3  106 ms 1 4) 3  107 ms 1

18. A plane electromagnetic wave of intensity 6 W/m2 strikes a small mirror of area 30 cm2, held
perpendicular to the approaching wave. The momentum transferred in kgm/s by the wave to the
mirror in each second will be
1) 1.2 × 10–10 2) 2.4 × 10–9 3) 3.6 × 10–8 4) 4.8 × 10–7
19. An intense light source radiates uniformly in all directions. At a distance 3m from the surface, the
radiation pressure on absorbing surface is 9 × 10–11 Pa. Find the total average power output in Watt
1) 1 2) 7 3) 2 4) 3
20. A beam of light travelling along x-axis is described by the electric field Ey= (600 Vm–1) sin  (t–x/c).
Then maximum magnetic force on a charge q=2e, moving along y-axis with a speed of 3×107 m/s is
(e =1.6×10–19 C)
1) 19.2×10–17 N 2) 1.92×10–17 N 3) 0.0192 N 4) None of these
SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions

21. A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 50mHz travels in free space along the positive x-direction.
 
ˆ / m . The corresponding magnetic field B at that point
At a particular point in spce and tie, E  6.3jV

is x  108 kˆ T . find the value of a

22. The magnetic field in a travelling electromagnetic wave has a peak value of 20nT. The peak value of
electric field strength (in volt m–1) is

23. A new system of unit is evolved in which she values of  0 and  0 are 2 and 8 respectively. Then, the s
peed of light in this system will be

24. 
The electric field associated with an em wave in vacuum is given by E  40 cos k 3  6  10 t ˆi , where
8

E, Z and t are in volt/m, meter and seconds respectively. The value of wave vector k̂ in (emetre–1) is

25. A parallel capacitor made of circular plates each of radius 10.0cm has a capacitance of 200pF. The
capacitor is connected to 200V AC supply with an angular frequency of 200 rad/s. What is the rms
value of conduction current (in A )?

193
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 17
RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

SYNOPSIS
Refraction
The phenomenon of bending of light when it travels from one medium to another medium is known as
refraction.

When the ray passes from rarer to denser medium, the refracted by bends towards the normal and
when it passes from denser to rarer medium, the refracted ray bends away from the normal. When
light passes from one medium to another medium, the frequency and colour of light remains same but
the wave length and velocity of light changes.
Laws of refraction
(i) The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal at the point of incidence are in same plane
(ii) The ratio sin of angle incidence to sin of angle of refraction is a constant for a given pair or media
and for a given colour of light

sin i
ie  a constant (n). This is known as Snell’s law
sin r
n2
If light passes from medium (1) to (2), the constant is 1n2 =
n1
n1
2 n1 
n2

1
Also we can write 1n2 =
2 n1

What happen if ray of light falls normally at the surface of separation of two media
The ray goes undeviate, ie. no refraction possible

194
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Sini Sin i Sin0

n Here i  0 ; Sin r    0 r  0
Sinr n n
Absolute refractive index
Refractive index of a medium with respect to air or vacuum is called absolute refractive Index, denoted
by n or 
Absolute refractive index of a medium is the ratio of the sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle
of refraction when refraction takes place from air or vacuum to the medium.
sin i
n
sin r
Since there is a change in the direction of light as it goes from one medium into another depends on
the speeds of light in the two media.
velocity of light in vaccum c
Refractive index of medium = 
velocity of light in medium v
Expression for the lateral shift when a ray of monochromatic light passing through a parallel
sided glass slab.

t
L.S  sin  i  r 
cos r
t = thickness i = angle of incidence
r = angle of refraction
Critical angle

When a ray of light passes from denser to rarer medium, the refracted ray bends away from the
normal (as i increases, r also increases). At a particular angle of incidence, the refracted ray just
grazes the surface of separation. This angle of incidence is known as critical angle (C). At this case
angle of refraction is 900. At critical angle , r = 90

Sin90 1
n 
SinC SinC
195
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Relative critical angle

The critical angle of a medium B with respect to a rarer medium A is related to the refractive index by
the formula.

1
A nB 
Sin A C B
where ACB is the critical angle of medium B with respect to A.
Some typical critical angles are listed below
Substance Refractive index Critical angle
Water 1.33 48.75o
Crown glass 1.52 41.14o
Dense flint glass 1.65 37.31o
Diamond 2.42 24.41o
Total internal reflection
If the angle of incidence is increased beyond the critical angle, the incident ray is reflected back to the
same medium obeying the laws of reflection (i = r). This is known as total internal reflection
The conditions for total internal reflection are
i) The light must travel from denser to rarer medium
ii) The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle
(c). Real and apparent depth: A fish at the bottom of a lake appears to be raised due to refraction. Let I
is the apparent position of the fish. AO is the real depth; AI is the apparent depth OI is the displacement
or shift of the image. (The fish is really at 0O.

Refractive index of the medium

Re al depth AO AO
n  or AI 
App.depth AI n
To find the shifts(S) in the position of the images
S = AO – AI

AO
S  AO   AO 1  1/ n 
n
196
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

But AO = t, the real depth

 1
S  t 1  
 n
Expression for refractive index of prism

AD
sin  
n  2  where
sin  A / 2 
n = refractive index A = angle of prism D = angle of minimum deviation
Deviation produced by a thin prism
A thin prism is a prism of small refracting angle. For a prism d = i1 + i2 – A
sin i1 sin i 2
n  r1 + r2 = A
sin r1 sin r2
When A is small r1 and r2 are small. When r1 and r2 are small i1 and i2 will be small (sinq = q when q is
small)
sin i1 i1
n  i1 nr1
sin r1 r1
Similarly i2 = nr2 Substituting d = nr1 + nr2 – A
= n (r1 + r2) – A [r1+ r2 = A] d = A (n–1)
Thus deviation is independent of the angle of incidence.
The factors on which the angle of deviation produced by a thin prism depends are
d = A (n –1)
1. Refractive index of the medium 2. Surrounding medium
3. Angle of prism
Dispersive power of a prism

Dispersive power of a medium is defined as the ratio of difference in deviation between the most and
least deviated colours to its mean deviation.
If dv and dR are the deviations for violet and red colours and ‘d’ its mean deviation.
 Dispersive power
dv  dR d  dR
:  where d  v
d 2
OR
If nv and nR are the refractive indices for violet and red colours for a medium and n the average
refractive index,
nv  nR n  nR
The   where n  v
 n  1 2

197
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Dispersion without deviation

For getting dispersion without deviation for the mean ray (yellow colour)
(1) Two small angled prisms of different materials are so combined with their bases opposite to each
other (or the refracting angles in opposite direction).
(2) If A and A/ be the angles, n and n/ the refractive indices of the two prisms then the condition for
dispersion without deviation for the mean ray is

A   n  1
A (n – 1) =  A  n   1 OR 
A n 1
The negative sign shows that deviation caused by the Ist prism is just cancelled by the 2nd one. Such
a combination is used in the construction of direct vision spectroscope.
Deviation without dispersion
For getting deviation without dispersion for the mean ray (yellow colour):

1) Two small angled prisms of different angles and different materials are so combined with their bases
opposite to each other. (or the refracting angles in opposite direction)
2). Let A and A  the angles nv and nR, n  and nR the refractive indices for violet and red colours for the
v
prisms. Then the condition for deviation without dispersion for the mean ray is
A(nv - nR) = A  nv  n R 

A   nv  nR 
OR 
A  n v  nR 
The negative sign shows that dispersion caused by the ist prism is just cancelled by the 2nd prism. The
combination is called achromatic combination.
The new Cartesian sign convention for reflection and refraction at spherical surfaces
This convention borrows the technique of fixing signs from co - ordinate geometry

198
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

1. The pole of the spherical surface will be the origin O and the principal axis along the X - axis
2. All distances are measured from the pole. Distances measured in the direction of incidence will be
positive and opposite to the direction of incidence negative.
3. Distances measured perpendicular to the principal axis will be positive if measured upwards and
negative if measured downwards.
One advantage of this system is that, if the object is placed to the left of the spherical surface, Cartesian
convention of sign comes into operation.
Relation between u, v and R

n 2 n1 n 2  n1
  R, +ve for convex surface R1 –ve for concave surface
v u R
n1 – Refractive index of the medium where the object is placed
The lens
A lens is a piece of transparent material with two refracting surfaces such that at least one is curved
and refractive index of its material is different from that of the surroundings.
Different types of lenses

Sign Convention
1. Whenever and where ever possible, rays of light are taken to travel from left to right
2. Transverse distances measured above the principal axis are taken to be positive while those below it
negative
3. Longitudinal distances are measured from optical centre and are taken to be positive if in the direction
of light propagation and negative if opposite to it.e.g., according to our convention in case of (A)

199
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Ray diagrams

Formula for thin lens (Len’s maker’s formula)

1  1 1  1 1 1
  (n  1)    –(4) and it is known as Len’s maker’s formula from (4 ) and (3) ,  
f  R1 R 2  f v u
This is known as the Lens formula or the law of distances for a lens
Power of a lens

1 100
It is the reciprocal of focal length. P  and
f (m) f (cm) is measured in dioptre (D). Power is positive
for the converging lens and negative for diverging lens.
200
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. A ray of light is incident at 500 on one of the two plane mirrors arranged at an angle of 600 between
them, The ray then touches the second mirror, get reflected back to the first mirror, makes an angle
of incidence  . The value of  is :
1) 500 2) 600 3) 700 4) 800
2. Two plane mirrors are inclined at 300. A ray of light incident on the 1st mirror at 500 and escapes after
three successive reflections. The total deviation suffered by the ray

1) 2200 2) 2000 3) 1600 4) 1800

3. A car has a rear view mirror of radius of curvature 2m. A motorcycle is approaching the car at 15m/s.
If the car is stationary how fast is the image of the bike approaching the car when the bike is 40m
away.
1) 0.003m/s 2) 0.006m/s 3) 0.009 m/s 4) 0.012 m/s
4. A candle flame 3cm is placed at distance of 3m from a wall. How far from wall must a concave mirror
be placed in order that it may from an image of flame 9cm high on the wall
1) 225 cm 2) 300 cm 3) 450 cm 4) 650 cm
5. The curve of a reflecting curved surface is represented by the equation y = 2x is shown in figure. A
2

ray of light pareallel to x-axis is incident on the curve at P(x,y) and after relection the ray is paralle to
y-axis then which of the following options is correct about x and y

1
1) x=0, y = 0 2) x = 2, y=2 3) x  1, y  2 4) x  ,y 1
2

201
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

6. A concave mirror of focal length 10cm and convex mirror of focal length 15cm are placed facing each
other 40cm apart. A point object is placed between the mirrors on their common axis at 15cm from
the concave mirror. The position and nature of the image produced by the successive reflections first
of the concave mirror and then at the convex mirror is
1) 6 cm behind the convex mirror and real 2) 6 cm behind the convex mirror and virtual
3) 30 cm behind the convex mirror and real 4) 30 cm behind the convex mirror and virtual
7. A small air bubble is inside a glass cube of side 32 cm. When viewed from one face, the bubble
appears to be at 15cm and viewed from the opposite face it appears to be at 5cm. The refractive
index of the material of the cube is
1) 1.5 2) 1.6 3) 1.7 4) 1.45
8. An observer can see through a pinhole the top and of a thin rod of height h placed as shown in figure.
The beaker height is 3h and its radius h. When beaker is filled with a liquid upto 2h, he can see the
lower and of the rod. The refractive index of the liquid is

5 5 3 3
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2

 4
9. Consider the situation shown in figure. Water   w   is filled in a beaker upto a height of 10cm. A
 3
plane mirror fixed at a height of 5cm from the surface of water. DIstance of image from the mirror
after reflection from it of an object O at the bottom of the beaker is

1) 15 cm 2) 12.5 cm 3) 7.5 cm 4) 10 cm
202
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

10. A slab of refractive index  is placed in air and light is incident at angle 600 from vertical. The minimum
value of  for which total internal reflection takes place at the vertical surface

3 3 7
1) 2) 3) 4) 2
2 2 2
11. A fish rising vertically up toward the surface of water with speed 3 ms-1 observes a bird diving vertically
down towards it with speed 9 ms-1. The actual velocity of bird is : (nw = 4/3)

1) 4.5 ms-1 2) 5.4 ms-1 3) 3.0 ms-1 4) 3.4 ms-1

12. Raysfrom a lens are converging towards a point image P as shown in figure A glass plate of thickness
t cm and refractive index 1.5 is placed in the path of the rays, as a result , the image is formed at P .
The value of t is

1) 5 cm 2) 8 cm 3) 6 cm 4) 4 cm

203
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

13. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue colours is incident on a right angled prism. The
refractive indices of the material of the prism for the above red, green and blue wavelength are 1.39,
1.44 and 1.47 respectively. The prism will

1) Separate part of red colour from the green and the blue colours
2) Separated part of the blue colour from the red and green colours
3) Seperate all teh colours from one another
4) Not separate even partially any colour form the other two colours

14. Angle of a prism is 300 and its refractive index is 2 and one of the suirface is silvered. At what angle
of incidence, a ray shoule be incident on one surface so that after reflection from the silvered surface.
It retraces its path

1) 300 2) 600 3) 450 4) sin 1 1.5

15. A thin prism P1 of angle 40 and refractive index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P2 whose
refractive index is 1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of P2 is:
1) 40 2) 5.330 3) 2.60 4) 30

16. Light from a point source in air falls on a convex spherical glass surface    1.5, R  20cm  . The
distance of light source from glass surface is 100cm. At what position is the image formed
1) 25 cm 2) 50 cm 3) 100 cm 4) 200 cm
17. A source of light is located at double focal length from a convergent lens. The focal length of the lens
is f = 30 cm. At what distance from the lens should a flat mirror be placed, so that the rays reflected
from the mirror are parallel after passing through the lens for the second time?
1) 60 cm 2) 30 cm 3) 45 cm 4) 15 cm
18. A biconvex thin lens is prepared from glass of refractive index 3/2. The two bounding surfaces have
equal radii of 25 cm each. One of the surrfaces is silvered from outside to make it reflecting. Where
should an object be placed before thin lens so that the image coincides with the object.
1) 25 cm 2) 12.5 cm 3) 50 cm 4) Infinity
19. The focal lengths of the objective and the eye-piece of a compound microscrope are 2.0 cm and 3.0
cm respectively. The distance between the objective and the eye-piece is 15.0 cm. The final image
formed by the eye-piece is at infinity. The two lenses are thin. The distances in cm of the object and
the image produced by the obhective measured from the objective lens are respectively
1) 2.4 and 12.0 2) 2.4 and 15.0 3) 2.3 and 12.0 4) 2.3 and 3.0

204
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

20. An astronomical telescope has an angular magnification 5 for distant objects. The separation between
the lenses is 36 cm and final image is formed at infinity. determine the focal length of objective and
eyepiece.

1) 32 cm, 4 cm 2) 30 cm, 6cm 3) 26 cm, 10 cm 4) 20 cm, 16 cm

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. An object is placed at a distance of 20cm on the axis of a convex mirror and a plane mirror is placed
between them at a distance of 5 cm from the convex mirror such that the image formed by both the
mirrors coincide. Focal length of the convex mirror is (in cm)

22. The focal length of a thin biconvex lens is 20 cm. When an object is moved from a distance of 25 cm
in front of it to 50 cm, the magnification of its image changes from m25 to m50. The ratio m25/ m50 is

23. A large glass slab    5 / 3 of thickness 8 cm is placed over a point source of light on a plane
surface. It is seen that light emerges out of the top surface of the slab from a circular area of radius
R cm. What is the value of R (in cm)

24. A ray is incident on prism at an angle i with normal, when it comes out of prism its angular deviation
is  . Graph between  and i is given. Prism angle in degree is

25. A point object is placed at a distance of 23 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. If a glass slab
of thickness t and refractive index 1.5 is inserted between the lens and object. The image is formed at
infinity. The thickness t in cm is:

205
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 18
WAVE OPTICS

SYNOPSIS
1. Wave front Intensity Amplitude

1 1
a. Spherical I A
r2 r

1 1
b. Cylindrical I A
r r

c. Plane I r 0 A  r0

2
2. Relation between phase difference and path difference   L

3. Amplitude of the resultant wave

A= A12  A 2 2  2A1A 2 cos 

I  A2

ie I  A 12  A 2 2  2A 1 A 2 cos  

I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1 I 2 cos 

 
2
I max I1  I 2  A  A2 
2

  1
4.
   A1  A 2 
2 2
Imin I1  I 2

5. I = Imax cos 2  / 2

W1 I1 A12
6.    W  slit width 
W2 I2 A 2 2

7. For constructive interference   2n  n  0,1, 2,3...

206
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

L  n  n  0,1, 2,3...

8. For destructive interference    2n  1   n  1, 2,3...

L   2n  1  / 2  n  1, 2,3...
9. In YDSE for constructive interference dsin   n (n = 0, 1, 2, 3...)

and for destructive interference dsin  = (2n–1)  / 2  n  1, 2,3...

Distance to the nth bright fringe from central maximum

nD
y nb   n  0,1, 2,3... and to the nth dark fringe ynd = (2n – 1) D2d  n  1, 2,3...
d
D  
Fringe width,   ; Angular fringe width   
d D d
I max  I min 2 I I
10. Fringe visibility V   1 2

I max  Imin I1  I 2
11. n  a constant n11  n 2  2

 
12. 
D d

13. If YDSE is performed in a medium 1   / 

14. If transparent sheet is introduced in the path of one of the two waves

D 
y0     1 t ; y0     1 t
d 
15. Diffraction

Position of the secondary minimum a sin   n  n  1, 2,3...

Position of the secondary maximum

  x D
a sin    2n  1  n  1, 2, 3.. First sec. min    ie x 
2 a D a

2
Angular width of the central maximum 2 
a

2D
Linear width of the central maximum 2x    2  D
a
1.22
The first minimum for the diffraction pattern of circular aperture of diameter d is located by sin  
d
16. Doppler effect of light

v
  
c
207
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

17. Polarization

I0
Malu’s law (Cosine squared law) I2 = I1 cos2  I1 =
2
if  = 90 (ie polaroids are crossed) I2 = 0 if  = 0 I 2 = I1
Brewsters law

nd
 tan B ; tan B  1
nr sin C
Teaching Poins
Wave concept of light
Huygens’s principle - Idea of wave fronts
Interference of Light
Condition of sustained interference
Coherent and incoherent sources
Youngs Double slit experiment
Experiment setup - Band width (Equation)
Special cases in YDSE
Bichromatic beam, white light, Electron beam
Introduction of transparent slab
Oblique incidence etc
Diffraction
Condition for diffraction
Diffraction at single slit
Linear and angular width of central maxima
Resolving power and limit of resolution
Fresnel distance - Validity of ray optics
Polarisation
Concept of polarisation
Polarised and unpolarised light, Malus law
Polarisation by reflection - Brewster’s law
Doppler Effect in light
Red shift and Blue shift

208
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. The two light beams having intensities I and 9 I interfere to produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The

phase difference between the beams is at point P and  at point Q. Then the difference between
2
the resultant intensities at P and Q will be:

1) 2 I 2) 6 I 3) 5 I 4) 7 I
2. The coherent light sources having intensity in the ratio 2x produce an interference pattern. The ratio
Imax  I min
I max  I min will be

2x 2x 2 2x 2 2x
1) 2) 3) 4)
2x  1 x 1 x 1 2x  1

3. Two light waves having the same wavelength  in vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first wave
travels a path L, through a medium of refractive index n1 while the second wave travels a path of length
L2 through a medium of refractive index n2. After this the phase difference between the two waves is :

2  L 2 L1  2  L1 L 2  2 
1)   
  n1 n 2  2)   
  n1 n 2  3)  n1L1  n 2 L 2  4)  n 2 L1  n1L 2 
 

4. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is smallest near the ground and increases with
height form the ground. When a light beam is directed horizontally the Huygens’ principle leads us to
conclude that as it travels, the light beam
1) bends downwards 2) bends upwards
3) becomes narrower 4) goes horizontally without any deflection
5. In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width is 12 mm. If the entire arrangement is placed in
4
water of refractive index , then the fringe width becomes (in mm):
3
1) 16 2) 9 3) 48 4) 12
6. In a Young’s double slit experiment, 16 fringes are observed in a certain segment of the screen when
light of wavelength 700 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400 nm, the number of
fringes observed in the same segment of the screen would be:
1) 24 2) 30 3) 18 4) 28

7. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are placed 0.320 mm apart. Light of wavelength   500 nm
is incident on the slits. The total number of bright fringes that are observed in the angular range
300    300 is
1) 640 2) 320 3) 321 4) 641

209
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

8. Consider a Young’s double slit experiment as shown in figure. What should be the slit separation d in
terms of wavelength  such that the first minima occurs directly in front of the slit (S1)?

   
1) 2
 52  2)
 52  
3) 2 5  2
 
4) 5  2

9. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between the two identical slits is 6.1 times larger than
the slit width. Then the number of intensity maxima observed within the central maximum of the single
slit diffraction pattern is:

1) 3 2) 6 3) 12 4) 24

10. This question has statement -I and Statement-2. Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose
the one that best describes the two Statements.

Statement I: In Young’s double slit experiment, the number of fringes observed in the field of view is
small with longer wavelength of light and is large with shorter wavelength of light.

Statement II : In the double slit experiment the fringe width depends directly on the wavelength of light.

1) Statement -I is true, Statement-2 is true and the Statement-2 is correct explanation of the |
Statement-I

2) Statement -I is false and the Statement -2 is true

3) Statemennt-I is true Statement-2 is true and the Statement -2 is not correct explanation of the Statement
-I

4) Statement -I is true and the Statement -2 is false

11. In Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slit is wider than other, so that amplitude of the light from
one slit is double of that other slit. If Im be the maximum intensity the resultant intensity I when they
interfere at phase difference  is given by :

Im Im   Im   Im  
1)  4  5 cos   2) 1  2cos
2
 3) 1  4 cos
2
 4) 1  8cos
2

9 3  2 5  2 9  2

210
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)


6 
12. In a Young’s double slit experiment the intensity at a point where the path difference is ( being the

I
wavelength of light used) is I. If I0 denotes the maximum intensity,
I0 is equal to

3 1 3 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 2 2 2

13. The maximum number of possible interference maxima for slit-separation equal to twice the wavelength
in Young’s double-slit experiment is

1) three 2) five 3) infinite 4) zero

14. A single-slit of a width a is illuminated by a monochromatic light of wavelength 600nm. The value of ‘a’
for which first minimum appears at   30 0 on the screen will be

1) 0.6m 2) 1.2m 3) 1.8m 4) 3m

 0

15. In a double-slit experiment, green light  5303A  falls on a double slit having a separation of 19.44m
 
and a width of 4.05m . The number of bright fringes between the first and the second diffraction
minima is:

1) 10 2) 05 3) 04 4) 09

16. Two polaroids A and B are placed in such a way that the pass-axis of polaroids are perpendicular to
each other. Now, another polaroid C is placed between A and B bisecting angle between them. If
intensity of unpolarised light is I0 then intensity of transmitted light after passing through polaroid B will
be:

I0 I0 I0
1) 2) 3) 4) Zero
4 2 8

17. ‘n’ polarizing sheets are arranged such that each makes an angle 450 with the preceding sheet. An
unpolarized light of intensity I is incident into this arrangement. The output intensity is found to be I/64.
The value of n will be :

1) 6 2) 3 3) 5 4) 4

18. A beam of plane polarised light of large cross-sectional area and uniform intensity of 3.3 Wm-2 falls
normally on a polariser (cross sectional are 3 104 m 2 ) which rotates about its axis with an angular
speed of 31.4 rad/s. The energy of light passing through the polariser per revolution, is close to:

1) 1.0  10 5 J 2) 1.0  10 4 J 3) 1.5  10 4 J 4) 5.0  10 4 J

211
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

19. Unpolarized light of intensity I is incident on a system of two polarizers. A followed by B. The intensity of
emergent light is 1/2. If a third polarizer C is placed between A and B, the intensity oif emergent light is
reduced to 1/3. The angle between the polarizers A and C is  . Then
1 1 1 1
2 4
1 4
1 2
2 2
1) cos     2) cos     3) cos     4) cos    
3  3  3 3
20. The angle of incidence at which reflected light is totally polarized for reflection from air to glass (refractive
index n), is
1) tan 1/ n  2) sin 1/ n  3) sin  n  4) tan  n 
1 1 1 1

SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions
21. A young’s double-slit experiment is performed using monochromatic light of wavelength  . The intensity
of light at a point on the screen, where the path difference is  , is K units. The intensity of light at a
 nK
point where the path difference is is given by , where n is an integer. The value of n is
6 12
____________.
22. In a single slit diffraction experiment light of wavelength 600 nm is used and the first minimum is
observed at an angle of 300. The width of the slit is (in m )
23. A source of light is placed in front of a screen. Intensity of light on the screen is I. Two polaroids P1 and
P2 are so placed in between the source of light and screen that the intensity of light on screen is I /2.
P2 should be rotated by an angle of ....(degrees) so that the intensity of light on the screen becomes
3I
.
8
24. Orange light of wavelength 6000  10 10 m illuminates a single slit of width 0.6  10 4 m . The maximum
possible number of diffraction minima produced on both sides of the central maximum is
______________
25. In Young’s double slit experiment two slits S1 and S2 are ‘d’ distance apart and the separation from slits
to screen is D (as shown in figure). Now if two transparent slabs of equal thickness 0.1 mm but
 0

refractive index 1.51 and 1.55 are introduced in the path of beam    4000 A  from S1 and S2
 
respectively. The central bright fringe spot will shift by ..................number of fringes.

212
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

CHAPTER - 19
MODERN PHYSICS

SYNOPSIS
Introduction
At normal conditions most of the gases do not conduct electricity. However, it can be made conducting
by (i) applying a very high voltage (ii) by reducing the pressure of the gas to a very low value, or (iii)
by irradiating the gas with certain radiations such as  -rays, X-rays, u-v rays etc. The process of
splitting up gas molecule into +ve and –ve ions is called ionisation. If the ionisation is taking place in
a tube having +ve and –ve electrodes the arrangement is called a discharge tube. Then +ve and –ve
ions move in opposite directions constituting an electric current called ionisation current. The flow of
electric current through gases is called discharge of electricity through gases.
The experiments with discharge tubes led to the discovery of X-rays by Roentgen in 1895 and cathode
rays (electron) by J.J Thomson in 1897.
Electrons and Photons
Experimental studies on conduction of electricity through gases at low pressures led to the discovery
of electrons by J. J. Thomson.

e 
1. The specific charge  m value  of the electron is determined by Thomson as 1.76 ×10111 C/kg
 

2. The charge of the electron is determined by Millikan as 1.602 × 10-19 C

3. The mass of the electron is then calculated as 9.11 × 10-31 kg
4. The electron is the integral part of all constituents of matter in all forms and the charge carried by it
is considered as the basic unit of charge
According to Planck’s quantum theory, light consists of tiny packets of energy called quanta or
photons of energy h  and momentum h / 
Electron Emission
Free electrons in the metals are responsible for their electrical conductivity. But, the free electrons
normally, can not escape from the metal. A certain energy is required for the emission of electron.
The minimum energy required to escape an electron from a metal surface is called the
work function 0 of that metal, and is expressed in eV (electron volt) [One eV is the KE acquired by
an electron when it is accelerated through a p.d of 1 volt
ie, 1eV = 1.602 × 10-19C × 1V = 1.602 × 10-19J].

213
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Metal o in eV Metal o in eV
Cs 2.14 Al 4.25
K 2.30 Cu 4.65
Na 2.75 Ag 4.75
Ca 3.20 Ni 5.15
Pb 4.25 Pt 5.65

The minimum energy required for the electron emission can be supplied by one of the following methods
(i) By heating (thermionic emission) (ii) By applying very strong electric field of the order of 108 V m-1
(field emission) (iii) By irradiating the surface with light rays of suitable frequencies (Photoelectric
emission)

Photoelectric Emission : Discovered by Hertz. The phenomenon of emission of electrons from the surface
of the metals when irradiated with  rays, X-rays, U.V rays or visible rays is called Photoelectric
emission.

Experimental Study

As p.d between A and B is increased, photoelectric current i decreases and becomes zero at a p.d V0.
This p.d is called cut off potential or stopping potential. At this conditions, the maximum KE of the
1
emitted electron mv 2max  eV0
2
Effect of intensity of light

Photoelectric current i or number of photoelectrons emitted is directly proportional to intensity of light.

214
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Effect of p.d between A and B

1. Saturation current value increases with intensity I of incident light

2. Cut-off potential V0 is independent of intensity
Effect of Frequency

1. Saturation current is same for all frequencies when intensity remains constant
2. Below saturation value photoelectric current depends on frequency - the higher the frequency the
larger the current.
3. Stopping potential is different for different frequencies - the higher the frequency the greater (-ve
value) the stopping potential.
Frequency and stopping potential

The graph with stopping potential against frequency is a straight line for all metals. These lines are
h
parallel and are having same slope (h is Planck’s constant and e is the charge of electron). Frequency
e
 0 is called the threshold frequency the minimum frequency for photo electric emission.
215
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Einstein’s Equation
The electron absorbs the entire energy of only one photon. Part of this is used as work function
(0  h0 ) and the rest remains as KE.

1
Then mv 2max  h  h 0
2

1
Also mv 2max  h(   0 )  eV0
2
Discussion
1. Velocity and hence KE of photoelectrons depends on the frequency  of incident lights.

2. If   0 there is no emission of photoelectrons

3. When intensity of light increases, number of photoelectrons emitted increases and hence
photoelectric current increases
4. When frequency of light increases stopping potential increases (-ve value).

1
5. If V0 is the stopping potential, mv 2max  eV0  h  h 0
2

h h
V0    0
e e

h
is the slope of the graph between V0 and 
e
Photocell : is a device used to convert light energy to electrical energy. There are three types of photocells.
Viz (i) photo emissive cell (ii) photo voltaic cell and (iii) photo conductive cell.
Photo emissive cell

It consists of a glass tube containing a cathode C and anode A. When light incident on C, photoelectrons
are emitted and are collected by A producing a current in the circuit. The change in intensity of light
produces corresponding change in photoelectric current in the circuit.
216
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

Photocells are used in burglar alarms, automatic switching arrangements, reproduction of sound in
cinemas, automatic counting devices etc.
Particle nature of Radiation - According to Planck, light consists of tiny packets of energy called
h h h
quanta or photons of energy value h and momentum . Momentum of photon P  mc  or  
  mc

 is the attribute of a wave while mc is an attribute of a particle. This shows the dual nature of
radiation.

Wave nature of particle

From the particle nature of radiation, Louis de Broglie, argued that what is true for radiation must be
true for particles also. ie, for a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v a wave must be associated
with it. This wave is called de Broglie wave or matter wave. The wave length of de Broglie wave,
h

mv

de Broglie wavelength of an accelerated electron

2eV
Velocity of electron accelerated through a p.d of V volts. v 
m

h h 12.27 o
 de Broglie wavelength of the electrons  mv   A
2meV V

For V = 100 volts,   1.227A o

This was verified by Davisson and Germer.

Davisson and Germer Experiment

Davisson and Germer allowed the electron beam accelerated through 54 volt to fall on a nickel crystal.
They measured maximum intensity of diffracted electron beam at an angle   50o . Then, the glancing
180  
angle    65o . Using this value in Bragg’s equation for X-ray diffraction 2d sin   n (here
2
o o
d  0.91A for nickel and n = 1) they calculated  as 1.65A . This is in close agreement with the
h 12.27 o

theoretical value     1010  1.66 A .

P 54
217
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Teaching Points
1. Basic idea of electron emission
i) Thermionic emission
ii) Field emission
iii) Photoelectric emission
iv) Secondary emission
2. Photoelectric effect
i) Basic idea
ii) Experimental study
iii) Effect of intensity of light on photocurrent
iv) Effect of potential on photoelectric current
v) Effect of frequency of incident radiation on stopping potential
3. Drawbacks of wave theory
4. Einstein’s photo electric explanation
 Idea of quantum of energy
 Photoelectric equation
 Particle nature of radiation
5. Wave nature of Matter
i) De Broglie wavelength
ii) Relation between accelerating potential & de Broglie wavelength
iii) Matter-wave picture & uncertainty principle
6. Davisson and Germer experiment
Atomic Structure and Spectrum
The first atom model was proposed by Thomson. The model failed to explain the origin of spectral
lines from the atom and the large angle scattering of  -particles. Then Rutherford proposed another
model of atom. According to Rutherford, the atom consists of a central core called atomic nucleus,
where the mass and positive charge of the atom are concentrated and the electrons are moving
round the nucleus in circular orbits. This model explained large angle scattering of  -particles. The
1 Ze.2e
distance of closest approach r0 
4 0 1 mv 2
2

218
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

1 Ze 2
Impact parameter b is given by b = cot   / 2 
4 0 1 mv 2
2

N 0nt  2Ze 2 
2
1 1
Number of atoms scatterd at an angle  , N  . 4 or,, N  
4  4 0  r 2  mv 02  sin   / 2 
2 2
sin 4   / 2 
Rutherford measured the size of the nucleus as of the order 10–15 m (ie, fm) and atoms as of the order
of 10–10m (ie, A0). But, the model failed to explain the origin of spectral lines from the atoms.
Bohr Atom Model
Bohr modified Rutherford atom model by introducing certain postulates.
1. Every atom consists of the central nucleus and the electrons are revolving round the nucleus in
specified orbits. The centripetal force required for the motion is given by

mv 2 1 Ze 2

r 4 0 r 2

mv 2 1 e2
For hydrogen Z = 1;   . .......................(1)
r 4 r r 2

h
2. The electrons can revolve only in orbits for which the angular momentum is an integral multiple of
2
h
ie; mvr = n .............................(2)
2
3. Electrons revolving in the orbit do not radiate energy.
4. Energy is radiated when the electrons jump from an outer orbit to inner orbit. The energy radiated is
given by, h = E2 – E1 ................................(3)
Calculations for hydrogen atom Z = 1
Radius of the orbit rn

0 h 2 2
Sq. eq (2) and devide by eq. (1) r = rn = .n ......(4)
me2
or ; rn  0.53 n 2 A 0 ..........................(5)
Velocity of electon vn

e2 c 1
Dividing eqn. (1) by eq (2) v  v n  .
2 0 h c n

1 c
or, v n  ...............................(6)
137 n

e2 1
   is called fine structure constant.
2 0 hc 137
219
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Period of revolution of the electron Tn

2rn
Period Tn =  n3 .....................(7)
vn
Energy of electron in the orbit En

1 e2 1 e2
KE = ; PE  
8 0 r 2 4 0 r 2

1 e2
TE = KE + PE = E = En =
8  0 r 2

 me 4 1
Substituting for r, E  E n  . ......................... (8)
8 02 h 2 n 2

1 1
In terms of fine structure constant En =  mc  .
2 2

2 n2
1
In eV, E n  13.6. ..........................(9)
n2

For n = 1 ie; ground state, E1  13.6eV, KE  13.6eV, PE  27.2eV

Spectral lines

From eqn (3) h  E n 2  E n1

c 1 2 2 1 1  1 1 1
ie; h  h   2 mc   n 2  n 2  or ,     R  n 2  n 2  ........................(10)
 1 2  1 2

 is the wavelength,  wave number

1 2 2
R is Rydberg constant, R = mc   1.097  107 m 1
2
For hydrogen like atoms

1
rn  .rn of H, Vn  Z  Vn of H
Z

1 1
E n  Z 2  E n of H,  Z 2  of H
 
Spectral series
1. For Lyman Series (U.V. rays) n1 = 1, n2 = 2, 3, 4, 5...............
2. For Balmer series (Visible rays) n1 = 2, n2 = 3, 4, 5,.................
3. For Paschen series (Infra red rays) n1 = 3, n2 = 4, 5, 6, ..............
220
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

4. For Bracket series (Infra red rays) n1 = 4, n2 = 5, 6, 7, ...............

5. For Pfund series (Far infrared rays) n1 = 5, n2 = 6, 7, 8, ..............
Spectrum - Emission spectra and Absorption spectra
Emission spectra are of three types
1. Line spectrum : is obtained when substances in atomic state are excited.
Eg : H spectrum, Hg spectrum, Sodium lamp
2. Band spectrum : is obtained when substance is in molecular state are excited.
Eg : O2, N2, CO2
3. Continuous spectrum : is obtained when matter in bulk is excited
Eg : Carbon arc, copper arc, hot filament lamp.
Absorption spectra is obtained when a composite light is passing through a less intense medium and the
transmitted light is examined through a spectro graph. If the medium is in atomic state, absorption
line spectrum is obtained and if the medium is in molecular state absorption band spectrum is obtained.
ATOMIC NUCLEI
Atomic nucleus is the central part of every atom. Its size is of the order of 1 fm or 10–15 m. The mass
of the nucleus is more than 99.9% of the mass of the atom and is expressed in atomic mass unit
(a.m.u) or simply u.
1
1 amu = of mass of 6 C12 = 1.66  1027 kg . When 1 a.m.u is fully converted into energy, the energy
12
produced is 1.49 x 10–10 J.
1 a.m.u.  931 MeV
A A
The nucleus of an atom is represented by z X or Z X
Where Z is the atomic number ie, number of protons and A is the atomic mass number ie, total
number of protons and neutrons
4 3
Nuclear size : The nucleus is assumed to be almost spherical. Its volume R  A
3
1
R3  A or, RR0A 3 ; R0 = 1.2 fm to 1.3 fm

mass A
Nuclear density :     2.29  1017 kg / m3
volume 4 R 3 A
0
3
Conservation Laws : The sum of mass-energy, the momentum and the total charge are conserved
before and after any nuclear interactions.
Binding Energy and mass defect
BE = mass defect x c2

BE = (Z m p   A  Z  m n  M N )c
2

MN  mass of nucleus
221
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

The importance of BE curve is that it led to the possibility of release of energy during nuclear fission
and fusion.

Nuclear forces : Nuclear forces are the strongest attractive forces and are existing between nucleons
- which are independent of charge, short range, non central, non-conservative and not obeying inverse
square law. The nuclear forces are dependent on spin or angular momentum of nuclei. According to
Yukawa, the exchange of  mesons is responsible for nuclear forces.

Natural Radio Activity

It is the spontaneous emission of certain active radiations from the nucleus of the atoms of certain
elements. The emitted radiations contain  -particles,  -particles and  -rays.

Decay Law - Rutherford and Soddy law.

Number of atoms disintegrated per second at any instant is directly proportional to the number of
radio active atoms actually present in the sample at that instant.

dN dN
ie; N or ,  N
dt dt

t
 Number of atoms left undecayed after t seconds N = N 0e

Half life period T is the time required to decay half the number of atoms initially present in the sample.

0.693
T=


t
n
1  1 T
Number of atoms left undecayed after n half life periods is, N n  N0    N0  
2 2

Mean life time 

1 T
   1.44 T
 .693
222
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

dN
Activity A . The rate of disintegration is the activity A. Then, A   N  N 0et
dt

Or, A = A 0e t

Units of Radioactivity

1) Curie (Ci)

2) Becquerel (Bq) SI unit

3) Rutherford (Rd)

 -decay: Emission of an  -particle from the nucleus of an atom is  -decay. It is represented by

Z X A  Z2 Y A 4  2 He4  Q .

Z X A is parent nucleus Z 2 Y A4 is daughter nucleus Q is disintegration energy which remains as KEs
of product particles.

 -decay means emission of an electron    or positron    from the nucleus. It is found that a   

 
emission is accompanied with the emission of an antineutrino    and  emission is accompanied


with emission of a neutrino   .

 -decay or emission

After an  -decay or  -decay the daughter nucleus is usually in an excited state. It attains stability by
the emission of one or more  -ray photons.
Nuclear fission is the process of splitting the nucleus of a heavy atom in to two nuclei of nearly equal
mass with release of large energy.

Eg : 92 U 235  0 n1 56 Ba144  36 Kr 89  30 n1  200 MeV

The three neutrons released can produce further fission and the process is going on, resulting in
chain reaction. An uncontrolled chain reaction results in explosion (atom bomb) and a controlled
chain reaction gives controlled release of energy and is achieved in nuclear reactors. The main parts
of a nuclear reactor are (1) nuclear fuel (U235 or Pu239) (2) Moderators - (heavy water, parafin) and
control rods (Boron, Cadmium)
Nuclear Fusion : is the fusion of two light nuclei into a single nucleus with release of large energy.
This requires large KE and hence very high temperature of the order of 107 K. So, fusion process is
taking place in the sun and the stars. Then, the process is also called thermonuclear process.
Teaching Points
I. Basic idea of atomic structure
a) Plum pudding model
b)  -particle scattering experiment and Rutherford’s atom model
c) Scattering angle

223
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

d) Closest distance of approach

e) Impact parameter
II. Rutherford’s model of hydrogen atom
a) Radius of orbit
b) Orbital velocity
c) Energy of atom
III. Draw back of Rutherford’s model
IV. Bohr model
a) Bohr hypothesis or Bohr postulates
b) Bohr model of hydrogen atom
c) Bohr model of hydrogen-like atom
V. Atomic spectra
a. Emission spectrum
b. Absorption spectrum
NUCLEI
I. Atomic mass and composition of nucleus
a) Atomic mass unit
b) Proton and neutron
c) Atomic number, mass number, isotope, isobar, isotone
II. Size of nucleus
a) Radius of a nucleus
b) Nuclear density
III. Mass-Energy relation
a) Einstein’s relation
b) Mass defect, Binding energy, Binding energy per nucleon
c) Binding energy per nucleons and mass number curve
d) Nuclear fission and nuclear fusion
e) Packing fraction
IV. Nuclear forces
a) Nuclear stability
V. Radioactivity
a) Basic idea
b)  -decay,  -decay,,  -decay
c) Law of radioactive decay
d) Half life, mean life
f) Activity
VI. Nuclear fission and working of reactor

224
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. The parallel beam of monochromatic light of wave length 500 nm is incident normally on a perfectly
absorbing surface. The power through any cross-section of the beam is 10W. Find

a) Number of photon absorbed by the surface per second

b) The force excerted by light beam on the surface

1) (a) 3.5 × 1010 photons/sec (b) 3.5 × 10–8 N

2) (a) 2.5 × 1029 photons/sec (b) 2.3 × 10–8 N

3) (a) 3.5 × 1019 photons/sec (b) 3.5 × 10–2 N

4) (a) 2.5 × 1019 photons/sec (b) 3.3 × 10–8 N

2. A special kind of light bulb emits monochromatic light of wavelength 700 nm. Electrical energy supply
to it at the rate of 60 W and the bulb is 50% efficient at converting that energy to light energy. How
many photons are emitted by the bulb during its life time of 1 day

1) 5.070 × 1025 2) 9.072 × 1024

3) 3.070 × 1012 4) 4.072 × 1015

3. A plate of mass 10 g is in equilibrium in air due to the force exerted by light beam on plate. Calculate
power of beam. Assume plate is perfectly absorbing.

1) 1.5 × 107 W 2) 3 × 107 W

3) 4.5 × 107 W 4) 6 × 107 W

4. In a photoemissive cell with exciting wavelength  , the fastest electron has a speed  . If the exciting
3
wavelength is changed to , the speed of the fastest emitted electrons will be
4

3 4 4 4
1)  2)  3) less than  4) greater than 
4 3 3 3

225
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. The stopping potential V for photoelectric emission from a metal surface is plotted along Y-axis and
frequency v at incident light along X-axis. A straight line is obtained as shown. Planck’s constant is
given by

1) Slope of the line

2) Product of slope on the line and charge on the electron
3) Product of intercept along Y-axis and mass of the electron
4) Product of slope and mass of electron
6. The figure shows the variation of photocurrent with anode potential for a photo-sensitive surface for
three different radiations. Let Ia, Ib and Ic, be the intensities and fa, fb and fc be the frequencies for the
curves a, b and c respectively

1) fa = fb and Ia  I b 2) fa = fc and Ia = Ic

3) fa = fb and Ia = Ib 4) f a  f b and Ia = Ib

7. An electron and a photon have same wavelength. It p is the momentum of electron and E the energy
P
of photon. The magnitude of in SI unit is
E

1 1 2
1) 2) 3) 4) None of these
2c c c

226
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

8. When a metallic surface is illuminated by a monochromatic light of wavelength  , the stopping

potential for photoelectric current is 3V0. When the same surface is illuminated by light of wavelength
2  , the stopping potential is V0. The threshold wavelength for this surface for photoelectric effect is

4
1) 6  2) 3) 4 4) 8
3

9. A proton, a deutron and an alpha particle are accelerated through potentials of V, 2V and 4V respectively.
Their velocities will bear a ratio

1) 1 : 1: 1 2) 1: 2 :1 3) 2 :1:1 4) 1:1: 2

10. A particle of mass m is projected from ground with velocity a making angle  with the vertical. The de
Broglie wavelength of the particle at the highest point is

1) h/mu 2)  3) h / mu sin  4) h / mu cos 


11. An electron of mass ‘m’ is moving with initial velocity v0 ˆi in an electric field E  E 0ˆi (E0 is positive).

Which of the following is correct de Broglie wavelength at a given time t (  0 is initial de Broglie
wavelength).

0 0 h h
 eE 0   eE 0   mv0   eE 
1) 1  t 2) 1  t 3) 1  t 4) 1  t
 m 0   mv0   Ev0   mv0 

m
12. A particle A of mass m and initial velocity v collides with a particle B of mass which is at rest. The
2
collision is head on and elastic. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelengths  A to  B after the collision is

A 1 A A 2 A 1
1)  2) 2 3)  4) 
B 3 B B 3 B 2

13. In Rutherford’s scattering experiment, if the number of  particles scattered at an angle of 900 is 55,
then calculate the number of  particles scattered at an angle of 600

1) 120 2) 220 3) 320 4) 420

227
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

14. A head on collision takes place between an  -particle of kinetic energy 5.5 MeV and a gold nucleus
(Z = 79). Calculate the distance of closest approach.

1) 4 × 10–10 m 2) 4 × 10–12 3) 4 × 10–14 m 4) 4 × 10–16 m

15. Calculate the angular momentum of an electron in Bohr’s hydrogen atom whose energy is –3.4 eV?

1) h  2) 2h  3) 3h  4) 4h 

1
16. A small particle of mass m moves in such a way that the potential energy U   mb 2 r 2 , where b is
2
a constant and r is the distance of the particle from the origin taken at the nucleus, Assuming Bohr
model of quantization of angular momentum and circular orbits. Radius of the nth allowed orbit is
proportional to

1) n 2) n 3) n2 4) n3

17. A hydrogen atom emits a photon corresponding to an electron transition from n = 5 to n =1. The recoil
speed of hydrogen atom is almost

1) 10-4 ms-1 2) 2 10 2 ms 1 3) 4 ms-1 4) 8  102 ms 1

18. A He+ ions is at rest and in ground state. A neutron with initial velocity u, kinetic energy K collides head
on with the He+ ion. Calculate minimum value of K so that there can be an inelastic collision between
these two particles.

1) 41 eV 2) 51 eV 3) 61 eV 4) 71 eV

19. The binding energy per nucleon of 3 Li 7 and 2 He 4 nuclei are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, respectively. In

the nuclear reaction 3 Li 7 1 H1  2 He   2 He 4  Q , the value of energy Q released is

1) 19.6 MeV 2) -2.4 MeV 3) 8.4 MeV 4) 17.3 MeV

228
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

20. One milligram of matter is converted into energy, the energy released will be

1) 90 J 2) 9  103 J 3) 9  105 J 4) 9  1010 J

SECTION - II

Numerical Type Questions

21. Calculate the nuclear radius of 125

Fe knowing that the nuclear radius of 27
Al is 3.6 fermi. (Answer in
fermi)

22. Energy released by fission of 1 gm U235 is x × 1010 J. Then value of x is

23. The radionuclide 11

6 C decays by   emission. Write symbolically this decay process.

Given that m  11
6 C   11.011434 u

m  11
6 B   11.009305 u

m e  0.000548 u, 1u  931.5 MrV / c 2

then Q value is nearly _____MeV.

24. An electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes a transition from an orbit with quantum number ni to
another with quantum number nf. Vi and Vf are respectively the initial and final potential energies of the
Vi
electron. If  6.25 , then the smallest possible n is:
Vf f

25. In a photoelectric emission, from a black surface, threshold frequency is v0. For two incident radiations
of frequencies v1 and v2, the maximum values of kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted in the
two cases is in the ratio 1 : p. If pv1 - v2 = 2v0, find the value of p

229
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

CHAPTER - 20
SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS

SYNOPSIS
Conductors have large number of free electrons. Good conductors : silver, copper, gold.
Insulators have very few free electrons. Good insulators : Mica, glass, paper.
Semiconductors have conductivity much less than that of conductors but slightly more than that of
insulators.
Outermost energy band in solids is conduction band; Band gap energy is the difference between the
energies of conduction band and valence band.
1 Types of Semiconductor
1) Intrinsic Semiconductor
eg: pure silicon or pure germanium
2) Extrinsic Semiconductor
eg: Impure Semiconductor
1.1 Difference between Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors

Intrinsic Extrinsic
1 Semiconductor in pure form. Pure semiconductor is doped with
It contains only one element impurity to increase the conductivity.
like Si or Ge
2 There is only one type semiconductor

3 Number of electrons and holes are In N-type, number of electrons are

equal, ne = nh = ni were ni is greater than number of holes and vice
intrinsic carrier concentration versa in P-type
4 Electrical conductivity is small. Electrical conductivity is high.
5 Conductivity is increased with Conductivity is mainly increased with
increase in temperature. increase in doping concentration.
6 By adding impurity, conductivity at
particular temperature can be changed.
7 Almost no practical use Used in electronic devices

Table 1.1

230
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

1.2 Types of extrinsic semiconductors :

1) N - type semiconductors
2) P-type semiconductors
• Doping is the process of adding impurity to the intrinsic semiconductor.
1.3 Distinguish between N-type and P-type semiconductors

N-type P-type
1 Intrinsic semiconductor with Intrinsic semiconductor with
pentavalent impurity trivalent impurity
2 Impurities are N, P, As, Sb, Bi Impurities are B, Al, Ga, In, Tl
3 Impuritiy atoms are called donor Impurity atoms are called acceptor
impurity which donate extra electrons atom which provide extra holes.
4 It has excess of electrons but
electrically neutral
5 ne > nh; electrons are called majority nh > ne; holes are called majority
charge carriers and holes are called charge carriers and electrons are called
minority charge carriers minority charge carriers
6 Acceptor energy level is just
above the valence band
7 Fermi level shifted towards
conduction band
8 Electrons are due to both doping and Holes are due to both doping and
thermal generation but ne ND thermal generation but nh NA
9 Holes are only due to thermal Electrons are only due to thermal
generation generation
10 Ie >> Ih and I Ie Ih >> Ie and I Ih
n i2 n i2 n i2 n i2
11 nh = ne =
ne ND nh NA

Table 1.2
2 PN junction diode
P N

2.1 PN junction formation

231
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

• Two important process during PN junction formation are diffusion and drift.

• During formation of PN junction, due to concentration gradient, hole diffused from P to N and
electrons diffused from N to P. This motion results in diffusion current.

• As the diffusion of charge carriers continue, a layer of positive charge developed on N - side and a
layer of negative charge developed on P - side. This space charge region is called deplition region.

• Larger the doping, smaller is the width of the PN junction.

• Due to the oppositively charged immobile ions, and electric field is directed from positive charge to
the negative charge ie, from N - side to P - side.

• Motion of charge carriers due to the electric field is drift current which is opposite to the direction of
diffusion current

• In a P-N junction under equilibrium there is no net current.

• Barrier potential prevents the further motion of majority charge carriers.

2.2 Biasing of PN juction

Forward bias Reverse bias

2.2.1 Comparission of biasing

Forward bias Reverse bias

Positive terminal of cell is connected to Positive terminal of cell is connected
1 P-region and negative terminal is to N region and negative terminal is
connected to N-region connected to P-region
External voltage (V) opposes the External voltage (V) support the
2
internal voltage (Vo ) internal voltage (Vo )
3 Effective voltage is |V - Vo | Effective voltage is |V + Vo |
4 Depletion width decreases Depletion width increases
5 Diffusion current flows from P to N Drift current flows from N to P
6 Current is due to majority charge carriers Current is due to minority charge carries
7 Current is in milli ampere order Current is in micro ampere order
Forward current rapidly increase at Reverse current rapidly increase at
8
knee voltage or threshold voltage breadown voltage
9 It offers low resistance It offers high resistance
For ideal diode it is equivalent to short For ideal diode it is equivalent to
10
circuited path open circuited path

Table 2.1
232
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2.2.2 V–I characteristics of a PN junction diode

V
Forward resistance rf = is very small. For an ideal PN junction the forward resistance is zero.
I
V
Reverse resistance rr = is large. For Germanium diode it is 40k  . For silicon diode it is 1000k  .
I
When the reverse biasing is larger than a certain value, the PN junction breaks down.

2.2.3 There are two types of junction breakdown

1) Avalanche break down

2) Zener breakdown

Avalanche breakdown is due to collision. Avalanche breakdown takes place in lightly doped diodes.
Zener breakdown takes place in heavily doped diodes.

2.3 Application of PN junction diode

2.3.1 Half wave rectifier

The output of a half wave rectifier is in the form of ripples. In a half wave rectifier the ripple frequency is
equal to the input frequency. The number of ripples per second is called ripple frequency.

233
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

2.3.2 Full wave rectifier

2.3.3 Comparission of rectifiers

Full wave rectifier Full wave rectifier

Name Half wave rectifier
(Centre-Tapped) (Bridge)

1 Number of diodes 1 2 4

Ordinary transformer Center taped Ordinary transformer

2 Transformer
transformer

3 i/p wave form

4 o/p wave form

5 o/p frequency i/p frequency 2 x i/p frequency 2 x i/p frequency

6 efficiency 40.6% 81.2% 81.2%

7 ripple factor 1.21 0.482 0.482

8 Irms I0 I0 I0
2 2 2

E0 E0 E0
9 Erms
2 2 2

10 Idcor I I0 2I0 2I 0
avg
  

11 Edcor E 2E 0 2E 0 2E 0
avg
  

Table 2.2
Filter circuits are circuits used to remove the ac components in the output of a rectifier. In forwrd biased
diodes the current is due to diffusion. Forward current is due to majority carriers. In reverse biased
diodes the current is due to drifting of electrons and holes.

234
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

2.4 Special purpose PN juction diodes

1. Name Zener diode Photo diode LED Solar cell

2. Symbol T

3. Operating rd
III Quadrent
rd
III Quadrent
st
I Quadrent
th
IV Quadrent
region
4. Biasing No biasing
5. Application Convert
light to
electrical
energy
6. Doping
7. Wide
V I Voc
V
I0
I1
8. I2
I3 I
I
I3 >I2 >I1 >I0 V I
9. Process Field ionization 1. Carrier Radiative 1. Carrier
during or field generation recombination generation
operation emission 2. Carrier 2. Carrier
seperation seperation
3. Carrier
Collection
Working Photo voltaic Photo voltaic
- -
principle effect effect
IR - Infra red, R - Red, A - Amber, Y - Yellow, G - Green, B - Blue

Table 2.3

2.4.1 Zener Diode

• Deplition width is less than 10–6 m

• Electric field of the junction is high about 5 106 V / m

• After reverse voltage Vz , zener voltage remains constant even though current through the zener
diode varies over a wide range.

• Field ionization or field emission : when reverse voltage, V = Vz, the electric field strength is
high enough to pull valance electrons from the host atom on the P side which are acceler-
ated to N side. These electrons account for the high current at break down. This emission of
electrons from host atom due to high electric field is known as internal field emission.

• The electric field required for field ionization is of the order of 106 V / m
235
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

Zener diode as voltage regulator:

Vi  Vz Vz
(i) Is = (ii) I L  (iii) I z  Is  I L (iv) Pz  Vz I z
Rs RL

V  Vz V  Vz
(v) R s  
Is I z  IL
• If input voltage increases, current through Rs and zener diode also increases. This increases voltage
drop across Rs without any change in voltage drop across zener. This is because in the break down
region, zener voltage remains constant eventhough current through zener changes.
• If we decrease input voltage, current through Rs and zener decrease without any change in voltage
across zener.
• Any increase/decrease in the input voltage results in increase/decrease of voltage drop across Rs
without any change in voltage across zener diode, thus it act as a voltage regulator.
2.4.2 Opto electric PN junction diode
(i) Photo diode:
• It is fabricated with a transperent window to allow the light to fall on it
• When photodiode is illuminated with light (photon) with h   E g , then electron-hole pair generates,
near the depletion region.
• Due to electric field at junction, electrons and holes are seperated before they recombine. [electrones
are collected on N - side holes are connected on P-side]
• Magnitude of photo current depends on intensity of incident light
• On illumination of light, fractional change in majority carriers would be much less than that in minority
charge carriers. ie, fractional change due to the photo effects on minority carrier dominated reverse
bias current and is more easily measurable than forward bias current.
(ii) LED
• Due to forward bias, minority carrier concentration at the junction increases. Thus they recombine
with majority carrier and energy is released in the form of photon with energy equal to or slightly
less than the band gap.
• Intensity of light from LED increases as forward current increases and reaches a maximum at a
critical value, further increase in forward current results in decrease of light intensity.
• V-I characteristics of LED is similar to that of silicon but threshold voltage is much higher and
different for each colour
• For fabrication of visible LED the energy gap must lie between 1.8 eV and 3 eV.
• GaAs1-x Px and for LED of different colours
• GaAs0.6P0.4 (Eg  1.9 eV) and for Red LED

236
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

• GaAs (Eg  1.43 eV) for infra red LED

• LED is used in remote controls, burglar alarm system
• advantages (i) low operational voltage and less power
(ii) fast action, no warm up time required
(iii) nearly monochromatic
(iv) long life and ruggedness
(v) fast on-off switching
(iii) Solar cell
• Top layer is made to be thin for generation near the depleation area
• Junction area has kept larger for handling more power
• Materials with band gap close to 1.5 eV (between 1eV – 1.8 eV) are ideal for solar cell fabrication
eg: Si (1.12 eV), GaAs (1.43 eV), Cd Te (e.45 eV) CuInSe2(1.04 eV)
• Sunlight is not required for a solar cell. Any light with photon energy greater than the band gap can
be used.

4 Digital Electronics
• In digital electronics we use only digital signals
• Digital signal is a pulse wave form, in which discrete values of voltage are possible
• We use binary numbers to represent digital signal ie 0 (say 0V) and 1 (Say 5V)

· In digital system, we follows boolean algebra

boolean multiplication boolean addition
0x0=0 0+0=0
0x1=0 0+1=1
1x0=0 1+0=1
1x1=1 1+1=1
237
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4.1 Logic Gates

• Logic gate is a digital circuit that follows certain logical relationship between the input and output
voltages

• Logic gates are basic building blocks of digital electronics

• Logic gate also represented by boolean expressions [We use capital letters of english alphabet for
representing variables of boolean expression]

• Operation of logic gate is indicated in a table known as truth table. It is the tabular representation of
all the possible combination of inputs and their corresponding outputs.

4.1.1 Basic logic gates

• There are three basic logic gates. AND gate, OR gate and NOT gate.
• We can realize all the boolean expression with the combination of these three logic gates.
Basic logic gates

Table 4.1
238
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

• Demorgan’s law : (i) A  B  A.B

(ii) A.B  A  B
• Indentities : (i) A + AB = A (iii) (A+B) (A+C) = A + BC

(ii) A . (A+B) = A  
(iv) A A  B  AB
4.1.2 Universal logic gates
• There are two universal logic gates, NAND gate and NOR gate.
• We can realize all the boolean expression using repeated use of universal logic gates. ie we can
realize other basic gates like OR, AND, NOT etc with these gates. Hence it is considered as basic
building blocks of other gates.
• NAND gate is an AND gate followed by a NOT gate similarly NOR gate is an OR gate followed by
a NOT gate
Universal logic gates

Table 4.2

239
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4.1.3 Exclusive logic gates

• There are two exclusive logic gate XOR gate and XNOR gate

1. Name XOR XNOR

2. X X

3. X =A+ B X =A+ B X =A. B

X = AB + AB X = AB + AB
i/p o/p i/p o/p
A B X A B X
4. 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1

Table 4.3
4.2 Wave form representation (A, B represent i/p)
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

AND
Gate

OR Gate
NAND
Gate

NOR
Gate

XOR
Gate

X-NOR
Gate

240
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

4.3 Realization of other gates using universal logic gates

Table 4.4

241
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

4.4 Integrated Circuits:

• We can fabricate an entire circuit including passive and active compounds, on a small single chip.
These are known as integrated circuit.

• Most widely used technology for IC manufacturing is monolithic integrated circuit.

• The chip dimensions are very small and is about 1mm  1mm.

• IC can be grouped into two categories

a) Linear or analogue IC eg : Operational Amplifier

b) Digital IC eg : logic gates

Term used for IC No of components

SSI (small scale integration) logic gate  10

MSI (medium scale integration) logic gate  100

LSI (large scale integration) logic gate  1000

VLSI (very large scale integration) logic gate  1000

Table 4.5

• The memory capacity of IC is doubled every one and half year. This is popularly known as moore’s law.

242
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

SECTION - I

1. Which of the following is wrong about a conductor

1) Lowest energy level of conduction band is lower than highest energy level of valance band

2) Conduction band and valance band overlap each other

3) The valence band is partially empty and conduction band is partially filled

4) The valence band is completely filled and conduction band is completely empty

2. The number of silicon atom per m3 is 5  1028 . This is doped simultaneously with Arsenic and Indium
at doping concentration 1:106 and 1:108 respectively. Then number of hole is  n i  1.5  10 per m 
16 3

1) 4.95  1022 2) 4.5  109 3) 4.5  1010 4) 4.95  1020

3. The charge of an n-type semiconductor is

1) positive 2) negative

3) depends on doping concentration 4) neutral

4. A PN junction diode is not connected to any circuit, then

1) Electron diffuses from P side to N side and hole diffuses from N side to P side

2) P-type side is at higher potential than the N-type side

3) There is an electric field at the junction directed from the P-type side to the N-type side

4) Barrier potential developed across the PN junction depends on nature of the material, doping
concentration on either side and temperature

243
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

5. Ge and Si diodes conduct at 0.3 V and 0.7 V, respectively. In the following figure, if Ge diode connection
are reversed, the value of V0 changes by

1) 0.2 V 2) 0.4 V 3) 0.6 V 4) 0.8 V

6. The diode used in the circuit shown in fig. has a constant voltage drop at 0.5 V at all currents and a
maximum power rating of 100 milliwatt. What should be the value of the resistance R connected in
series and with diode for obtaining maximum current?

1) 2  2) 4  3) 6  4) 10 

7. Which of the following statement is not true about intrinsic semiconductor

1) The hole behaves as apparent free particle with effective positive charge

2) Number of free electrons ne is equal to number of holes nh, that is ne = nh= ni

3) Motion of hole is a convenient way of describing the actual motion of bound electrons

4) At equilibrium rate of thermal generation greater than the rate of recombination of charge carriers

244
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

8. In the circuit shown in figure, the maximum output voltage V0 is

5
1) 0 V 2) 5 V 3) 10 V 4) V
2

9. Output Waveform of the given circuit diagram is

17V
8.5V
8.5V
1) 2)

8.5V
3) 4.25V 4)

245
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

10. In a p-type semiconductor the acceptor level is situated 60 meV above the valence band. The maximum
wavelength of light required to produce a hole will be

1) 0.207 x 10–5 m 2) 2.07 x 10–5 m

3) 20.7 x 10–5 m 4) 207 x 10–5 m

11. V-I characteristics of some PN junction devices are given:

(i) Fig 1 represent V-I characteristics of solar cell with A and B represent open circuit voltage and open
circuit current

(ii) Fig 2 represent V-I characteristics of LED with A, B, C are corresponding to Green, Red and Infra
red colour respectively

(iii) Fig 3 represent the V-I characteristics of photo diode with I3 > I2 > I1

1) (iii) only correct 2) (ii) only correct

3) (i) only correct 4) (i) and (iii) are correct

12. Assuming the diodes to be of silicon with forward resistance zero, the current I in the following
circuit is

1) 0 2) 9.65 mA 3) 10 mA 4) 10.36 mA

246
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

13. The I-V characteristic of a P-N junction diode is shown below. The approximate dynamic resistance
of the p-n junction when a forward bias of 2 volt is applied is

1) 1 2) 0.25 3) 0.5 4) 5 

14. Draw the output signal Y in the given combination of gates

1) 2)

3) 4)

247
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

15. An N-type silicon sample of width 4 × 10-3 m, thickness and length 25 × 10-5, 6 × 10-2 respectively
carries a current of 4.8 mA. When the voltage is applied across the length of this sample. If the free
electron density is 1022m-3. Find how much time it takes for the electrons to travel the full length of the
sample
1) 0.5 sec 2) 4 sec 3) 0.3 sec 4) 0.02 sec
16. The logic gate equivalent to the give circuit diagram is :

1) OR 2) NAND 3) NOR 4) AND

17. The output waveform of the given logical circuit for the following inputs A and B as shown below.

1) 2)

3) 4)

248
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

18. The output Y for the inputs A and B of circuit is given by

A B Y A B Y
0 0 1 0 0 1
1) 0 1 1 2) 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 0

A B Y A B Y
0 0 0 0 0 0
3) 0 1 1 4) 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0

19. Figure given gives a system of logic gates. From the study of truth table it can be found that to
produce a high output (1) at R, we must have

1) X = 0, Y = 1 2) X = 1, Y = 1

3) X = 1, Y = 0 4) X = 0, Y = 0

249
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

20. The given circuits are act as

i)

ii)

iii)

iv)

1) (i) and (ii) represent and gate AND (iii) and (iv) represent OR gate
2) (i) and (iii) represent AND gate and (ii) and (iv) represent OR gate
3) (i) and (iv) represent NAND gate and (ii) and (iii) represent NOR gate
4) (i) and (iv) represent OR gate and (ii) and (iii) represent AND gate

SECTION - II
Numerical Type Questions

21. The value of power dissipated across the zerner diode  Vz  15V  connected in the circuit as shown
in the figure is x  10 1 watt

The value of x, to the nearest integer, is

250
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

22. An N-type silicon crystal of cross sectional area 10–6m2 carries a current of 4.8mA. If free electron
density is 1022/m3 when the voltage is applied across the length 6cm of the crystal, find how much
time taken for the electron to trace full length of the sample

23. The current gain of a transistor in common base mode is 0.995. The current gain of the same transistor
in common emitter mode is

24. In the figure the current through the diode is (use ideal diode approximations)

25. In connection with the circuit drawn below, the value of current flowing through 2k resistor is
......  104 A

251
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

JEE (Advanced) 2025 : Syllabus

252
Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

253
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

JEE (MAIN- 2025) - Syllabus

254
Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

255
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

256
Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

257
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

258
 Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

KEAM SYLLABUS -2025

259
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

260
Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

261
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

262
Repeaters 2025-Jee Main - Physics(Study Material)

263
 Brilliant STUDY CENTRE

264